Giao an ca nam

Bạn đang xem bản rút gọn của tài liệu. Xem và tải ngay bản đầy đủ của tài liệu tại đây (1.03 MB, 354 trang )

(1)Period:1. Review. Date of planning: 13/08/2017 Date of teaching: 16/08/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ....................................................................................................... I- Objectives: After the lesson, students will review the main contents of the lessons which are learned in class 6 : The simple present tense, the present continuous tense, near future, wh- questions, comparative and superlative of short adjectives.. 1. Knowledges: Review 2. Skills : Speaking , listening 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions: - How can you describe people’s appearance ? III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions. - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments. IV - Teaching aids: Sub-board, Book , chalk , cassette , tape..... V- Procedures:. 1. The tenses of verbs 5’ a. The present simple tense. * Tobe: am, is, are (+) I am = I’m (-) I am not = I’m not We We You are You are not They They He He She is She is not It It * Ordinary verbs : (+) I (-) I We + V( without To ) We You You They They He He She + Vs(es) She It It. (?) Am I…….? We Are You ………? They He Is She ……….? It + Don’t + V. + Doesn’t +V.

(2) (?). I He We Does She +V ? Do You + V ? It They b. The present continuos tense: (+) S + am / is / are + Ving . (-) S + am / is / are + not + Ving. (?) Am / is / are + S + Ving ? c. Near future : (+) S + am / is / are + going to + V. (-) S + am / is / are + not + going to + V. (?) Am / is / are + S + going to + V ? 2. Wh- questions : 5’ * What : - What’s your name ? => My name is An. What’s her name ? => Her name is Hoa . - What do you do? => I am a teacher . What does he do ? => He is a doctor . * Where : Where do you live? => I live on Nguyen Du street . Where does she live ? => She lives at 135 Hang Bai Street. * How many + Ns . How many students are there in your class? …………..tables …………………………? * What time / When What time do you usually get up ? When do you do your homework? * How : - How are you ? => I’m fine, thanks. - How do you go to school every day ? => I go to school by bike . * How old : How old are you ? * Why? Why does he have bad marks? * Which : Which shirt do you like : red or blue? * Who : Who is Mrs Lan talking to? 3. Comparative and superlative of short adjectives : 5’ a. Comparative: S1 + tobe + adj + er + than + S2. EX: She is taller than me . b. Superlative : S + tobe + the + adj + est ………… EX: He is the tallest in my class . Practice : 30' Ask Ss to do exercises , then the teacher corrects them . Exercise 1: Supply the correct forms of the verbs in brackets..

(3) 1. My brother ( do ) ………………….his homework in his room now, He ( do ) ……………….it everyday. 2. They ( visit ) ……………………..us next week . 3. It usually ( rain )…………………… in the rainy season. 4. I ( not go ) ……………………….to school on Sunday . 5. Listen! I think the telephone ( ring ) …………………………. Exercise 2 : Make questions for underlined words. 1. Mr Quang lives on Hung Vuong street . 2. Her new friends come from Autralia. 3. There are 13.6 million people in Mexico city . 4. Nam usually has lunch at 11:30. 5. Hoa is going to play badminton with her friend. Exercise 3 : Put the correct form of the adjective in bracket. 1. The country is ………………….than the city .( quiet ) 2. Minh’s house is the……………….. to the town.( near ) 3. Which is the ………………………city in your country ? ( large ) 4. Hambledom isn’t ……………………than London. ( pretty ) 5. The town isn’t clean. The country is …………………( clean ) Consolidation : No Homework : Review and prepare unit 1. Eperiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................

(4) Period: 2. UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL Lesson 1 : A- Friends ( 1,3,4 ).

(5) Date of planning: 13/08/2017 Date of teaching: 18/08/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ....................................................................................................... I- Objectives: After the lesson, students will review the greetings and introduce themselves . They will practice 4 skills : Listening, speaking, reading and writing.. 1. Knowledges: After this lesson Ss can be know about: * Vocabulary: - Nice to meet you . - How is everything? * Grammar: The present simple tense. 2. Skills : Speaking , listening. - Just fine/ not bad - Pretty good./ so am I.. 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions: - How can you describe people’s appearance ? III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions. - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments.. IV - Teaching aids: Sub-board, Book , chalk , cassette , tape.... V- Procedures: T’activities Ss’ activities 1. Warm up: 5 mins - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game called slap the board. - 2 groups play game. T reads the questions => Ss slap the answers. - Listen. a. What’s your name? Goodbye Yes, I am b. How are you today? c. What class are you in? d. Goodbye. Very well, e. Are you a new student? thanks - Demonstrate the group which wins the game. 2. New activities: 35 mins a) Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Introduce some situations: + Nice to see/ meet you.. Class 7A. My name is Hoa. - Listen and write down..

(6) + Nice to see / meet you again. + So am I. - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape. - Ask Ss to read in pairs. - Call on some pairs to roleplay the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct the mistake. - Ask Ss to look at the asnwers then work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and asnwer the questions in front of the class. - Correct then give the correct answers. b) Listen. Then practice with a partner. - Ask Ss to look at the picture in part 3 and introduce the picture. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. c) Listen. Complete the dialogues. - Ask Ss to complete the dialogues in part 4 - Explain some new phrases: + How is everything? + Just fine. + Pretty good. - Have Ss complete the dialogues. - Ask Ss to exchange the results with their partners. - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers. a.+ How are you? + Pretty good. + How about you? + Not bad./ + Me too. b. + How is everything? + Ok. How are you today? +Just fine./ + So am I. - Have Ss roleplay the completed dialogues in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogues in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. 3. Consolidation: 3 mins - Have Ss work in pairs making a dialogue. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the. - Read in chorus and individually. - Look at the books and listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Write down. - Look at the picture and listen. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Complete the dialogues. - Listen and write down. - Complete the dialogues individually. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Give the answers. - Copy down.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class..

(7) class. - Remark. 4. Homework:2 mins - Learn by heart new words - Complete the dialogue in part 4 in exercise book. Do exercise 1,2 in workbook. - Prepare part A2,5,6.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................

(8)

(9) Period:. 3 UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL Lesson 2 : A- Friends ( A2,5,6). Date of planning: 13/08/2017 Date of teaching: 19/08/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ....................................................................................................... I- Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to understand the information about Hoa and practice reading skill.. 1. Knowledges: After this lesson Ss can be know about: Vocabulary : - To be different from… - Unhappy >< happy - To miss Grammar: Review : - The present simple tense. - Comparison. 2. Skills : Speaking , listening. 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions: - How can you describe people’s appearance ? III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions. - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments. IV - Teaching aids: Sub-board, Book , chalk , cassette , tape..... V- Procedures:.

(10) Contents, time 1. Warm up :5’. Teacher’s Activities - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game.. Students’ Activities - Greetings. - Play a game in 2 groups. 2 groups take part in the game to find out the words which have been learnt.. Keywords: School, old, big, happy, uncle, new, friend, live, student, parent. - Demonstrate the group which wins the game. - Clap hands. 2. Pre- reading: 20’ - Introduce the situation + Different ( adj) : khác nhau + Unhappy (adj) >< happy buồn + To miss (v) : ( give a situation ) nhớ. a. Hoa’s school in Hue is small. b. Hoa is a new student in class 7A. c. Hoa’s new school is bigger than her old school. d. Hoa is from Hue. e. Now she lives in Hanoi.. - Introduce the situation, then explain some new words: - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. * Check new words by playing a game: rub out and remember. - Have Ss do an exercise in groups : Ordering statements. a. Hoa’s school in Hue is small. b. Hoa is a new student in class 7A. c. Hoa’s new school is bigger than her old school. d. Hoa is from Hue. e. Now she lives in Hanoi. - Call on some groups to give their predictions in front of the class. 3. While- reading: - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape, then correct their predictions. - Ask Ss to check the result with their partner.. - Listen and write down. - Guess the meanings. - Read new words in chorus and individually. - Play a game. - Work in groups.. - Give the predictions.. - Listen and correct the predictions..

(11) b. She is staying with her uncle and aunt. c. No, she doesn’t. d. Her new school is bigger than her old school. e. She is unhappy because she misses her parents and her friends.. - Correct and give the correct answer: 1.b 2.d 3.e 4.a 5.c. - Have Ss read the text 3. While- reading: in silent. - Ask Ss to look at the - Call on some Ss to book and listen to the tape, read the text aloud. then correct their - Ask Ss to read the predictions. questions and the text again, then work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers. a. - Check the result. - Copy down.. - Read in silent. - Read aloud. - Work in pairs.. - Practice in front of the class. - Write down.. 4.Post-reading: - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game. ( each student writes a sentence in the text ) 5. Homework:5’ - Learn by heart part 2 and write the answers in the exercise book. - Do exercise 3,4 in work book. - Prepare B1,2,3.. - Play a game.. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................

(12)

(13) Period: 4 UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL B- Names and addresses.( B1,2,3) Date of planning: 20/08/2017 Date of teaching: 23/08/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ....................................................................................................... I- Objectives:. By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about personal information such as: name, age, address…. 1. Knowledges: After this lesson Ss can be know about:. Vocabulary: - Family name (n): Họ - Middle name (n ): tên đệm - Address (n): Địa chỉ Grammar. - The simple present tense. - Structure: What’s your family name? What’s your middle name? 2. Skills : Speaking , listening. 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions: - How can you describe people’s appearance ? III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions. - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments. IV - Teaching aids: Sub-board, Book , chalk , cassette , tape..... V- Procedures:. Teacher’s Activities 1. Warm up: 5’ - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game called: Noughts and Crosses . - Have Ss ask and answer about the information in the grids. - Remark and demonstrate the group which wins. Students’Activities - Greetings. - Play a game in 2 groups.. Ask and answer the questions. EX: S1: How old are you?.

(14) the game. 2. New activities: a) Listen. Then practice with a partner. 15’ - Introduce the situation of the dialogue, then explain some new words. + Family name (n) : tên họ + Middle name (n) : tên đệm + Address (n) :địa chỉ - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to look at their books and listen to the tape . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to look at the questions then work in pairs : one asks and one asnwers. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers: a. She is talking to Mrs Lien. b. Her family name is Pham. c. Her middle name is Thi. d. She lives at 12 Tran Hung Dao street. - Give some cues then ask Ss to practice in pairs. + Nam – Nguyen – 15 – 32 Nguyen Du street. + Hoa – Pham – 12 – THD street. + Minh – Tran – 13 – Da Nang. + Thuy – Bui – 14 – LHP street. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. b) Write . Complete this dialogue. 15’ - Introduce the situation of part 2. - Ask Ss to complete the dialogue . - Ask them to exchange the result with their partner. - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers: Who- Who – What/which – Where – Where –. S2: I’m 13 - Listen and write. - Guess the meanings. - Read new words in chorus and individually. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Copy down.. - Practice in pairs using the cues.. - Practice in front of the class.. - Listen. - Complete the dialogue. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Give the answers. - Copy down..

(15) How. - Call on some pairs to read the completed dialogue aloud. - Correct their pronunciation. 3. Consolidation: 7’ - Have Ss ask the partner questions then complete the form. - Ask Ss to give the questions for the information. - Make model with a student: EX: What’s your name? How old are you? Which grade are you in? What’s your school’s name? or Which school do you study at? Where do you live? - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Remark. 4. Homework: 3’ - Complete the form in the exercisebook. - Do exercise 1,2 at page 5,6 in workbook. - Prepare part B4,5.. - Practice reading the dialogue.. - Ask the partner and complete the form. - Give the questions. - A student answer the teacher’questions.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ........................................................................................

(16) Period:. 5. UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL Lesson 4: B – Names and addresses ( B4,5) Date of planning: 20/08/2017 Date of teaching: 25/08/2017.

(17) I. Objectives: 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, the students will be able to ask and answer about distances. Practice listening, speaking, reading and writing skills. 2. Skills : Speaking , listening. 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. How far is it from your house to the market. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions. - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments. IV - Teaching aids: Sub-board, Book , chalk , cassette , tape..... V- Procedures:. Teacher’s Activities 1. Warm up: 5’ - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare - Ask Ss to find out the words in order to ask and prepositions. -Have Ss play in 2 groups. W W H W E B R Y E F. W H A T R. H E O O O. Y N N W M. - Remark and demonstrate the group which wins the game. 2. New activities: a) Listen. Then practice with a partner. 20’ - Ask Ss some questions such as: + Where do you live? + How do you go to school? => Then lead in new structure: + How far is it from your house to school? => It’s about one kilometer. - Have Ss makesentences with new structure. - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape.. Students’ Activities - Greetings. - Play a game in 2 groups.. Where, who, what, why, how, when. on, at, by, from, to.. - Answer T’s questions. - Listen and write down. - Make sentences . - Look at the book and listen to the tape..

(18) - Ask them to read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss some questions: + Where does Hoa live? + Is it far from school? + How does she get there? b) Ask and answer with a partner. 10’ - Have Ss look at 4 pictures in part 5. - Ask them to practice in pairs asking and answering about distances . EX: How far is it from your house to the market? It’s about one kilometer. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. 3. Consolidation: 7’ - Give some given cues then ask Ss to practice in pairs. + Market / 2 km + Post office / 700 meters + School / 1 km + Bus stop / 5oo meters - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Have Ss make a dialogue based on the dialogue between Nam and Hoa. - Call on some pairs to practice. 4. Homework: 3’ - Write part 5 in the exercisebook. - Do exercise4,5 at page 6,7 in workbook. - Prepare part B6,7.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front the class. - Answer T’s questions.. - Look at 4 pictures in the book. - Practice in pairs .. - Practice in front of the class.. - Work in pairs.. - Practice in front of the class. - Make a dialogue. - Practice in front of the class. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ UNIT 1 : BACK TO SCHOOL Period: 6 Lesson 5: B – Names and addresses ( B 6,7) Date of planning: 20/08/2017 Date of teaching: 26/08/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. Objectives :.

(19) The students will continue to practice asking and answering about distances. Practice listening and speaking skills. 1. Knowledge: The students will continue to practice asking and answering about distances. Practice listening and speaking skills. Review the structure : How far is it from…….to ……..? It’s about ………….. 2. Skills :Listening and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Where do you live? + How do you go to school? + How far is it from your house to school?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids:. Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure:. Contents, times. Teacher’s Activities. Students’ Activities. 1. Warm up :5’. 2. New activities: 20’ a) Listen and write. - Introduce the situation of the lesson. How far is it ? Write the four distances.. - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions about themselves. EX: What’s your name? How old are you? Where do you live? How far is it from your house to school? How do you go to school? - Remark and give marks.. - Greetings. - Answer T’s questions.. - Introduce the situation of the lesson.. - Write new lesson.. How far is it ? Write the four distances. - Ask Ss to look at the picture in part 6.. - Listen. - Look at the picture..

(20) - Have Ss call the names of the places. - Ask Ss some questions such as: + Is Lan’s house near or far from school? + Is Lan’s house near the market/ the post office/ the theater? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape then find out the distance between the places. - play the tape for Ss 2 times. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to give the results in front of the class. - Play the tape again for Ss to check their answers.. - Call the names of the places. - Answer T’s questions.. - Listen to the tape. - Find out 4 distances. - Exchange the results with the partners. - Give the results. - Listen to the tape and check.. Correct and give the correct answers:7’ a. School to Lan’s house : 300m b. Lan’s house to the post offfice : 700m c. School to the movie theater : 3km d. Movie theater to the post office : 2km - Have Ss practice asking and answering the distance between the places. - Correct the mistake. b) A survey:6’ b) A survey: - Ask Ss to look at the form - Ask Ss to look at the form in in part 7. part 7. - Introduce the aim of this part: Ask their classmates some information then fill in the form. - Have Ss give the questions for the information. - Make model with a student: + What’s your name? + Where do you live? + How do you go to school? + How far is it from your house to school?. - Practice asking and answering. - Look at the form in part 7. - Listen. - Give the questions for the information. - Answer T’s questions.. - Work in pairs..

(21) - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.. - Practice in front of the class.. - Ask Ss to base on the information and write a short passage about their partner. - Call on one student to go to the board and write, some Ss read aloud. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. * Remember: - Ask Ss to look at the remember and practice in pairs, using the questions in the box. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.. - Write a short passage.. - Make questions and answers in part remember. - Prepare unit 2- A1,2,3.. - Write homework.. 3. Consolidation: 5’ My friend is……..He/She lives at……….. He/ She goes to school by………It’s about…….. from……….to……... 4. Homework: 2’ - Write part 6 in the exercisebook.. - Write on the board and read aloud.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. VI. Experiences: ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................................ .............................................................................................................................................

(22) UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period: 7 LESSON 1 : TELEPHONENUMBERS (A1, 2) Date of prepared: 27/ 8 /2016 Date of teaching : 30/ 8 /2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for and give telephone numbers and further practice in addresses. They continue to practice 4 skills. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask for and give telephone numbers and further practice in addresses.

(23) - Telephone directory. - To call somebody. - What’s your telephone number?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Where do you live? + Does your home have a telephone?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure:. Contents, times. Teacher’s Activities. Students’ Activities. 1. Warm up : 5’ - Ask Ss some questions :. 2. Presentation:20’ - Introduce: Nowadays telephone has been very popular in our social communication. + Telephone directory( n): danh bạ điện thoại + To call ( somebody) : gọi. - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions : + Where do you live? + Does your home have a telephone? …….. => Lead in new lesson.. - Greetings. - Answer T’s questions.. - Introduce: Nowadays telephone has been very popular in our social communication. In this lesson we’ll deal with this matter. - Explain some new words: + Telephone directory( n): + To call ( somebody) : - Ask Ss to look at part 3 and listen to the tape. - Explain the model: + What’s your telephone number? 8 262 019 + What’ her telephone number?. - Listen. - Write down. Read new words. - Look at the book and listen to the tape. - Listen and write..

(24) 3. Practice : 10 - Ask Ss to read the telephone numberin the telephone directoryin part 1 => explain the way of reading.. - Make model: What’s TanA’s telephone number? 8 211 800. - Have ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation.. - Read in pairs.. - Ask Ss to read the telephone numberin the telephone directoryin part 1 => explain the way of reading. - Ask them to practice asking and answering about the telephone number in the telephone directory. - Make model: What’s TanA’s telephone number? 8 211 800 - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary. - Ask Ss to listen some people’s telephone numbers , then write the numbers they hear. - Play the tape for Ss 2 times. - Ask them to exchange the results with the partners. - Call on some Ss give the answers. - Play the tape again and ask Ss to check the answers. - Correct and give the correct answers: a. 8 251 654 d. 8 352 793 b. 8 250 514 e. 8 237 041 c. 8 521 936 f. 8 821 652. - Read the telephone numbers. - Read aloud.. - Ask Ss to have a survey. Name Address. - Take a survey.. - Practice in front of the class.. - Practice asking and answering. - Listen.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Listen and write.. - Exchange the results with the partners. - Give the answers. - Listen to the tape and check. - Write down.. 4. Production:5’ + What’s your name?.

(25) + Where do you live? + What’s your telephone number?. Telephone number - Have Ss work in pairs asking about the information given, using these questions: + What’s your name? + Where do you live? + What’s your telephone number? - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.. - Work in pairs.. - Practice in pairs in front of the class.. 5. Homework: 5’ - Write the questions and answers about telephone numbers of the people in part 1 (6) - Prepare part A4,5 .. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(26) UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period: 8 Lesson 2: A - Telephone numbers ( A 3,4) Date of prepared: 27/ 8/2016 Date of teaching : 01/ 9/2016 Organization : ....................../............... students. Absent’ students: ........................ I. The aims: After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about sure events in the future by using“ Will” positive statements and “ Wh” questions. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to talk about sure events in the future by using“ Will” positive statements and “ Wh” questions. - To meet ( v ) - Free ( adj ) - To see a movie - Would you like to? - Where will we meet?.

(27) - Let’s meet at……. - Don’t be late. * Future tense: S + will + V . S + will not + V Will + S + V?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Would you like to + V ? + Would you like to see a movie? + Where will we meet?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan. V. Procedure: T’s Activities Ss’ Activities Contents, times 1. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game; Jumbled - Play a game words ESE; TRAST ; VOMEI ; REHATTE ROMTOROW : TALE - Call on some Ss to go to the board - Go to the board and and write. write. - Remark and give marks. 2. Presentation: 20’ - Have Ss look at the picture and ask them to guess the talk. + Would you like to + V ? Would you like to see a movie? + Where will we meet? + Let’s meet at 6:45 + Don’t be late. * Future tense:. - Have Ss look at the picture and ask them to guess the talk. - Introduce some new words and structures: + Would you like to + V ? Would you like to see a movie? + Where will we meet? + Let’s meet at 6:45 + Don’t be late. * Future tense: (+) S + Will + V .. - Look at the picture and guess. - Listen and write..

(28) (+) S + Will + V . (-) S + will not + V . (?) Will + S + V ?. (-) S + will not + V . (?) Will + S + V ? EX: She will go to Hanoi tomorrow. I will not play soccer this afternoon. Will you buy a new book ? - Ask Ss to make sentences based on the models.. - Make sentences.. 3. Practice:12’. 4. Further practice: 5’ * Listen, then write the answers. - Introduce the aim of the lesson for Ss .. - Play the tape for Ss. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to roleplay the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct the pronunciation. - Ask Ss to look at the questions then work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers: a. Phong and Tam will. b. They will see a movie. c. They will meet at 6:45 d. They will meet in front of the movie theater. - Give some cues then ask Ss to practice. + Where / meet / on the street. + What time/ meet / 7:00 + What / see / a movie. + How / go / bike. EX: Where will we meet? We’ll meet on the street. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake.. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. * Listen, then write the answers. - Introduce the aim of the lesson for Ss .. - Listen carefully. - Listen and complete the table.. - Ask them to listen to the tape carefully and find out the information to complete the table.. - Listen to the tape.. - Work in pairs. - Ask and answer in front of the class. - Write down.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class..

(29) - Play the tape for Ss 2 times. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and check the answers. - Correct and give the correct answers: a. 8 545 545 b. a movie c. Lan’s house d. Bus - Ask Ss to base on the information in the box to write a short passage. - Call on one student to go to the board and write , some Ss read the passage aloud. - Correct. 5. Homework: 5’ - Learn by heart new structures by making 5 sentences with each.. - Learn by heart new structures by making 5 sentences with each. - Do exercise 1,2 at page 8 in workbook. - Prepare A6,7.. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Give the answers. - Listen again to check the answer. - Listen and write.. - Write a passage. - Go to the board and write. - Read aloud. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(30) UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period: 9 Lesson 3 : A - Telephone numbers ( A 5,6,7) Date of prepared: 3/ 9/2016 Date of teaching : 6/ 9/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ..................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice and use the simple future tense with Will , Wh- questions and answer fluently. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to practice and use the simple future tense with Will , Wh- questions and answer fluently * Vocabulary : - Who’s calling? - To be out - Can I speak to….? To be back. - I’ll call again. * Grammar: The simple future tense..

(31) 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. What…….do tomorrow morning? go……..stadium What……watch? A football match/ would …like…with me?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan. V. Procedure: T’s Activities Ss’ Activities Contents, times 1. Warm up : 5’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions and ask - Answer T’s questions. them to make a dialogue. - Call on 2 pairs to make - Practice in front of the dialogues aloud. class. - Remark and give mark. - Explain some structures when talking on the phone. 2. Presentation: 10’ + Who’s calling? - Explain some + Can/ Could I speak to ……..? structures when talking + I’ll call again. on the phone. + To be out + To be back. EX: Can I seak to Lan? She is out . - Ask Ss to make sentences. - Correct the mistakes.. 3. Practice : 15’. - Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and read in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Have Ss read the dialogue again. - Listen and write. Read in chorus and individually.. - Make sentences. - Work in pairs. - Practice reading in front of the class. - Read the dialogue again.

(32) 4. Production: 7’ What…….do tomorrow morning?. then find out the answers for the questions. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class. - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers: a. Phong is. b. Han is. c. About Lan. d. At about 6 o’clock. e. After 6. - Use the tittle of A7 to set a scene and ask Ss to find the questions for the answers. a. At five thirty. b. We’ll eat cakes and sweets. c. Till seven or half past. d. We’ll meet in the street. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape then read after the tape. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Correct their pronunciation.. and find the answers.. - Give a mapped dialogue Tan Nam What…….do tomorrow morning? go……..stadium What……watch? A football match/ would …like…with me? Yes, when…..start? 4:30 / ……meet at 4:15 Where ……meet? in front of …stadium. ok. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake.. - Listen to the tape and read after the tape. - Read aloud.. - Ask Ss to read the remember carefully.. - Read the remember.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class.. - Listen carefully and find the questions.. - Look at the mapped dialogue.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class..

(33) go……..stadium What……watch? A football match/ would …like…with me? Yes, when…..start? 4:30 / ……meet at 4:15 Where ……meet? in front of …stadium. ok. 5. Homework: 5’ - Learn by heart new structures by making 3 sentences with each and learn by heart remember.. - Call on some Ss to read aloud.. - Learn by heart new structures by - Write homework. making 3 sentences with each and learn by heart remember. - Do exercise 3,4,5 at page 9 in workbook. - Prepare part B1,2,3.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(34) UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period: 10 Lesson 4 : B - My birthday ( B1,2,3) Date of prepared: 3/09/2016 Date of teaching : 8/09/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write and speak about ordinal numbers, months and the dates of the months fluently. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write and speak about ordinal numbers, months and the dates of the months fluently * Vocabulary: - Dates of the months. - Ordinal numbers. * Grammar: Review: The simple future tense.. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :.

(35) - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What is it? How many months are there in a year?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan , calendar.. V. Procedure:. Contents, times. Ts’ Activities. Ss’ Activities. 1. Warm up :7 mins - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game called pelmanism - Play a game in groups. 1st 2nd 10th 5th 3rd 9th First second tenth fifth third ninth - Remark and lead in new lesson. - Listen. 2. New activities: 33 mins a) Listen and repeat. - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape. - Explain some ordinal numbers. + Ordinal numbers + th + Special cases: First : 1st Ninth : 9th Second : 2nd Twelfth : 12th Third : 3rd Twentieth : 20th Fifth : 5th Thirtieth : 30th - Play the tape for Ss and ask them to read after the tape. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Ask Ss to speak about festival Days of Vietnam 2/9 ; 30/4 ; 20/11 ; 8/3 - Remark.. - Look at the books and listen. - Listen and write .. - Read after the tape. - Read aloud. - Practice speaking: The second of september The thirtieth of april The twentieth of november The eighth of march.

(36) - Ask Ss to look at the book and answer b) Listen and write the the question: dates. What is it? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and write the numbers. - Play the tape for Ss 2 times. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class. - Play the tape again for Ss to check. - Correct and give the correct answers: The first of july. The fourteenth The nineteenth The seventeenth The sixth The thirty- first - Ask Ss to write down.. - Answer T’s question. ( A calendar of july ). - Listen to the tape and write. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Give the answers. - Listen to the tape again and check.. - Write down. - Ask Ss some questions such as: c) Write the months in How many months are there in a year? order from first to - Have Ss do exercise : Matching twelfth. January Tháng 10 February Tháng 7 January March Tháng 5 February April Tháng 12 March May Tháng 1 April June Tháng 4 May July Tháng 9 June August Tháng 2 July September Tháng 6 August October Tháng 11 September November Tháng 3 October December Tháng 8 November - Ask Ss to do exercise individually. December - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class. - Correct and ask Ss to read aloud . - Have Ss write down. 3. Consolidation:4 mins. - Repeat the ordinal numbers.. 4. Homework: 1mins. - learn by heart ordinal numbers.. - Answer T’s question.. - Do exercise. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Give the answer. - Read aloud. - Copy down. - Listen..

(37) - Do exercises 1,2 at page 10 in workbook. - Prepare B4,5.. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(38) UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period : 11 Lesson 5: B - My birthday ( B 4,5) Date of prepared: 3/ 09/2016 Date of teaching : 7A: 9/ 09/2016 7B: 6 / 9/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims : After the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and answer about the date of birth fluently and they continue to practice the simple future tense. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to ask and answer about the date of birth fluently and they continue to practice the simple future tense. * Vocabulary: - Nervous - To worry - Worried * Grammar : The simple future tense.. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:.

(39) 1) What’s your family name? 2) How old are you? 3) What’s your address? 4) What’s your telephone number? 5) What’s your date of birth?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan , calendar.. V. Procedure: T’s Activities Ss’ Activities Contents, times 1. Warm up : 8’ - Greetings . - Greetings. Play a game called -Have Ss play a game called Lucky - Play a game in 2 Lucky numbers. numbers. groups. 1) What’s your family name? 2) How old are you? 3) LN 4) What’s your address? 5) What’s your telephone number? 6) What’s your date of birth? 7) LN 8) Who do you live with? 9) How old will you be on your next birthday? 10) LN - Listen. - Remark and lead in new lesson.. 2. New activities: 20’ a) Listen. Then practice with a partner.. - Ask Ss to look at the picture about Mr Tan and Hoa . Then Ask Ss to guess what Mr Tan is asking Hoa. - Call on some Ss to answer. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and give the information.. - Explain some new words: + Nervous ( adj) : rụt rè, sợ sệt + To worry(v) : lo lắng + Worried ( adj ) : ( cảm thấy) lo lắng - Have Ss read in chorus and. - Look at the picture and guess. - Answer. - Give the information: + Name. + Date of birth. + Address + Telephone number. - Listen and copy .. - Read in chorus and.

(40) - Explain some new words: + Nervous ( adj) : Hồi hộp + To worry(v) :Lo lắng + Worried ( adj ) :. * About you: 5’ - Ask a student some questions in part about you. b) Read the dialogue again . then complete this form.. individually. - Check new words by playing What and where. - Play the tape for Ss to listen again. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to look at the questions and work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Call some sts give answers - Correct and ask Ss to copy down. * About you: - Ask a student some questions in part about you. - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.. individually. - Play a game.. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and complete the form.. - Read the dialogue again. - Complete the form. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Work in pairs.. - Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about the information in the form. - Call on 2 Ss to ask and answer in front of the class. - Correct and ask Ss to complete the form in the notebooks.. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice reading in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Give answers - Write the answers on the board. - Copy down. - Practice in front of the class.. - Practice in front of the class. - Copy down.. 3. Consolidation: 7’ - Ask Ss to base on the information in the dialogue to make a dialogue. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct if necessary. 4. Homework: 5’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each.. - Make a dialogue. - Work in pairs. Practice in front of the class..

(41) - Do exercise 3,4 at page 11 in workbook. - Prepare part B6,7,8,9.. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(42) UNIT 2 : PERSONAL INFORMATION Period: 12 Lesson 6 : B - My birthday ( B 6,7,8,9) Date of prepared: 10/ 09/2016 Date of teaching : 7A: 13/ 09/2016 7B: 13/ 9/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to write an invitation card for a birthday party. They will use the dates of the month fluently. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write an invitation card for a birthday party. They will use the dates of the month fluently. * Vocabulary: - Birthday party. – To join - To invite - Fun - To finish - Invitation card * Grammar: Review : The simple future tense. 2. Skills :Reading and writing 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What is Lan doing?.

(43) + What are they doing in the picture? + How old is she now? + Where does she live? + When is her birthday. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan , calendar.. V. Procedure: T’s Activities Ss’ Activities Contents, times 1. Warm up : 7’ - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Networks - Play a game in 2 groups. Things to buy on birthday - Call on 2 Ss from 2 groups to go to the board and write . - Remark and lead in new lesson. 2. New activities: 25’ a) Read. Then complete the card.. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the questions: + What is Lan doing? + What are they doing in the picture? - Explain some new words: + Birthday party (n) : bữa tiệc sinh nhật + To invite (v) : mời + Invitation card (n) : thiếp mời + To finish (v) = to end : hoàn thành + To join (v) = to take part in: tham gia + fun (n) : vui vẻ - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Have Ss play a game : rub out and remember. - Ask Ss to read the text about Lan and find out the answers to the questions. + How old is she now? + Where does she live?. Discuss in groups. - Go to the board and write.. - Look at the pictures and answer . - Listen and write . - Guess the meanings .. - Read new words in chorus and individually. - Play a game. - Read the text and find the answers for the questions..

(44) + When is her birthday? + When will the party start and finish? - Call on some Ss to answer the questions. - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud. - Ask Ss to look at the invitation card of Lan and then complete it, using the information from the text. - Have Ss compare the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read the completed card aloud. - Correct the mistake and ask Ss to write in the notebooks. b) Think and write. Imagine you will be a guest at Lan’s birthday party.. - Have Ss imagine they will be a guest at Lan’s birthday party. What will they do? - Have Ss work in groups of 4 or 5 discussing what they will bring to Lan’s birthday party. - Go around the class and hepl Ss if necessary. - Call on some representatives to demonstrate in front of the class. - Remark.. c) Now write an invitation card to your birthday party:. - Have Ss write an invitation to their birthday party based on part 6. - Ask Ss to exchange their writing with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read their invitation in front of the class. - Remark.. 3. Consolidation: 5’. d) Play with words. - Have Ss look at the book and listen to the tape. -Ask Ss to read after the tape. - Call on some Ss to read in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation.. - Answer the questions. - Read the text aloud. - Complete the invitation card. - Compare with the partner. - Read aloud.. - Imagine . - Work in groups. - Demonstrate in front of the class.. - Write an invitation. - Exchange the writing with the partner. - Read aloud.. - Listen to the tape. - read after the tape. - Read aloud. - Repeat..

(45) - Ask Ss to look at the remember and repeat again. 4. Homework: 5’. - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each. learn by heart part remember. - Do exercise 4,5 at page 12 in workbook. - Prepare part A 1 ( unit 3). - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(46) Period: 13. UNIT 3 : AT HOME Lesson 1 : A – What a lovely home ( A1). Date of prepared: 10/ 09/2016 Date of teaching : 7A: 14/ 09/2016 7B: 14/ 9/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: After the lesson, Ss will be able to use the exclamations by giving compliments and complaints , they will learn about the things in the bathroom and the kitchen. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the exclamations by giving compliments and complaints Vocabulary: - Awful - Washing machine - Sink - Dryer - Comfortable - Refrigerator - Tub - Dishwasher - Amazing - Electric stove - Convenient Grammar: Structure: What + a/ an + adj + N! What + adj + Ns !. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:.

(47) + How many rooms are there in your house? + What are they? + What is in each room?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan V. Procedure:. Contents, times. T’s Activities. Ss’ Activities. 1. Warm up:. Test 15 mins. 2. New activities: 18’ a) Listen. Then practice with a partner. + Awful ( adj ) : Tồi tệ + Comfortable (adj) : Thoải mái + Amazing (adj) : Ngạc nhiên + Sink (n) :Bồn rửa mặt + Tub (n) : Bồn tắm + Washing machine (n ) : Máy giặt + Dryer (n) :Máy sấy + Refrigerator (n) : tủ lạnh + Dish washer (n) : Máy rửa bát + Electric stove (n) : lò nướng + Convenient (adj): Thuận tiện. Objectives: checking up the knowledges of students about old lesson: write an invitation card for a birthday party - Ask Ss some questions such as + How many rooms are there in your house? + What are they? + What is in each room? - Introduce the situation of the lesson, then explain some new words: - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Check new words by playing : rub out and remember. - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape , then find out the things in the bathroom and the kitchen. - Call on some Ss to tell the things in the bathroom and the kitchen. - Remark. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class.. - Greetings. - Do the test. - Answer T’s questions.. - Listen and write. - Guess meanings. - Read new words in chorus and individually. - Play a game. - Listen to the tape and find the things. - Give the results.. - Work in pairs. - Practice reading in front of the class..

(48) - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions. - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers: a) Living room, Hoa’s room, bathroom and kitchen. b) Because it is bright and it has nice colors. c) A sink, a tub and a shower. d) A washing machine, a dryer, a refrigerator, a dish washer, and an electric stove. - Have Ss copy down. b) Write exclamations: 5’ - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about themselves, using 2 questions in the book.. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about themselves, using 2 questions in the book. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find the exclamations. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Introduce the exclamations to Ss. EX: What a hot day ! ( Today is very hot ) What a boring film! ( The film is very boring.) - Give some situations , then ask Ss to make exclamations. + This boy is very lazy. + The story is very interesting. + The house is dark. - Have Ss give the structures.. - Work in pairs. - Practice asking and answering. - Copy down.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Read the dialogue and find the exclamations. - Read aloud. - Listen and write. - Make sentences.. 3. Consolidation: 4’ - Ask Ss to practice - Ask Ss to practice making making exclamations using exclamations using given cues in - Write exclamations. given cues in the book. the book. - Call on some Ss to read their - Read aloud. writing aloud . - Correct and ask them to write - Write down..

(49) 4. Homework : 3’ - Make 5 sentences with complaints and compliments.. down. - Ask Ss to use the structures of - Make exclamations. exclamatioms to make sentences. - Remark. - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Make 5 sentences with complaints and compliments. - Do exercies 1,2 at page 13 in workbook. Prepare part A2,4.. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(50) Period: 14. UNIT 3 : AT HOME Lesson 2 : A – What a lovely home ! ( A 2,4). Date of prepared: 10/ 09/2016 Date of teaching : 7A: 15/ 09/2016 7B: 15/ 9/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: After the lesson, Ss will review vocabularies about the things in the house and prepositions of position, using structures : There is…../ There are….. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will review vocabularies about the things in the house and prepositions of position Review : - vocabularies about the things in the house. - Prepositions. - There is …../ there are …... 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. Is there a bookshelf? Yes, there is. Where is it? It is on the wall.. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do..

(51) - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: T’s Activities. Contents, times 1. Warm up : 7’ - Have Ss play a game:Noghts and crosses. Ss’ Activities. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game:Noghts and crosses. - Greetings. - Play a game in 2 groups. - Making sentences.. 2. New activities: 25’ a) Look at the picture . then practice with a partner. * Point and say: - Ask Ss to look at the picture carefullyand tell the things in the picture, using there is/ there are….. Dinner. Movie. Restaurant. Boy. Shirt. Room. Girl. House. Party. - Ask Ss make exclamations. - Remark. a) Look at the picture . then practice with a partner. * Point and say: - Ask Ss to look at the picture carefullyand tell the things in the picture, using there is/ there are…. - Make examples: + There is a table. + There are some chairs. + There are some pictures. - Call on some Ss to say the things in the picture aloud. - Correct the mistakes. - Have Ss write in the notebook. * Ask and answer. - Have Ss practice in pairs asking and answering the things in the picture and using the words in the box. - Ex: Is there a bookshelf? Yes, there is. Where is it?. - Write lesson. - Look at the picture and tell the things. - Listen.. - Say the things in the picture. - Write down. - Work in pairs.. - Listen..

(52) It is on the wall. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake if necessary. - Ask Ss to write down.. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Write down.. b) Play with words.. 3. Consolidation:7’ - Ask Ss to look at the remember and read.. - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape. - Explain some new words: + Smell ( n ) mùi + To forget: quên >< To remember : nhớ + Safe ( adj): an toàn - Have Ss read after the tape. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Correct their pronunciation.. - Look at the book and listen to the tape. - Listen and write.. - Ask Ss to look at the remember and read. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Ask Ss to make sentences with them.. - Read.. - Make sentences with remember. - Do exercise 3,4 at page 14,15 in workbook. - Prepare B1.. - Write homework.. - Read after the tape. - Read aloud.. - Read aloud. - Make sentences.. 4. Homework: 6’. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(53)

(54) UNIT 3 : AT HOME Lesson 3 : B- Hoa’s family ( B1). Period: 15 Date of prepared: 17/ 09/2016 Date of teaching : 7A: 20/ 09/2016 7B: 20/ 9/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: After the lesson, Ss will learn about jobs and job vocabulary. They will apply the in the life. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will learn about jobs and job vocabulary. They will apply the in the life. 1. Vocabulary: - Countrysise - Cattle - To grow - To raise - Till - Housework - To take care of - Journalist - To write for - Sick 2. Grammar: Review : The simple present tense.. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. Is there a bookshelf? Yes, there is. Where is it? It is on the wall.. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do..

(55) - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents T’s Activities 1. Warm up: - Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare - Ask Ss to find out the words about the jobs. - Remark and lead in new lesson. 2. New lesson: a) Listen. Then practice with a - Ask Ss to look at the picture partner. in the book. - Introduce the situation of the dialogue then ask Ss to guess what Hoa’s parents do. - Explain some new words. + Countryside(n) :nông thôn + To grow (v) : Trồng + To raise (v) : Nuôi - Have Ss read new words in + Cattle (n) : gia súc chorus and individually. + Till (adv) : cho tới khi - Correct their pronunciation. + Housework (n) : Công việc nhà - Play the tape for Ss 2 times. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class. * Now answer: - Have Ss work in pairs. - Remark. - Ask Ss to write down the answers in the notebooks. b) Read. - Asks sts answer the - Ask Ss to look at 3 pictures questions: in the book and guess what 1) What does Hoa’s father do? they do. 2) Where does he work? - Call on some Ss to tell about 3) LN their jobs. 4) What is her mother’s job? - Correct and give the correct 5) What does her mother do answer, then introduce some everyday? new words:. Ss’ Activities - Greetings. - Play a game in 2 groups. - Find out the jobs. - Listen. - Look at the picture . - Listen and guess.. - Listen and write. - Guess the meanings. - Read new words in chorus and individually. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice reading in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Write the answers. - Look at 3 pictures in the book. - Tell about the jobs. - Listen and write..

(56) 6) LN 7) Are they happy? 8) How old is Hoa’s sister?. 3. Consolidation: - Have Ss write a short passage about their family. - Ask them to exchange the writing with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read their writing in front of the class. 4. Home work: - Learn by heart new words by. + To take care of = To look after: chăm sóc + To write for (v) viết cho + Journalist (n): phóng viên + Sick (adj) = ill: ốm - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Ask them to play a game : Rub out and remember. - Have Ss read the text about Lan’s family in silent. - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud. - Correct the pronunciation. * Now practice with a partner. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about Lan’s family. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers: + Her father is a doctor. He works in a hospital. + Her mother is a teacher. She teaches in a primary school. + Her brother is a journalist. He writes for a HN newspaper. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about their family. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Remark.. - Read new words . - Play a game. - Read in silent. - Read aloud. - Work in pairs.. - Practice in front of the class. - Listen and write.. - Work in pairs. - Practice.. - Write a short passage. - Exchange the writing. - Read aloud.. - Write homework..

(57) writing 3 lines for each. – Prepare part B2,3,4. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(58) UNIT 3 : AT HOME Lesson 4: B – Hoa’s Family ( B 2,3,4 ). Period: 16 Date of prepared: 17/ 09/2016 Date of teaching : 7A: 21/ 09/2016 7B: 21/ 9/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: After the lesson, Ss will know the work of each job, and listen to the tape in order to know the information then complete the forms. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will know the work of each job, and listen to the tape in order to know the information then complete the forms. 1. Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about the jobs. 2. Grammar: Review : the present simple tense. Skill : Listening.. 2. Skills :listening 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. Where does he work? What does your mother do? Do you have any brothers / sisters? How old is he/ she?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times T’s Activities. Ss’ Activities.

(59) 1. Warm up: 5ms Ask Ss some questions Where does he work? What does your mother do? Do you have any brothers / sisters? How old is he/ she?. 2. New activities: 25ms a) Match these halfsentences. + A farmer works on a farm. + A doctor takes care of sick people. + A journalist writes for a newspaper. + A teacher teaches in a school.. b) Listen, complete these forms for the three people on the tape. - Ask Ss to use the inform mation about 3 people then ask and answer. - Make EX: + What is his name? => His name’s Tom. + How old is he? => He is 26. + What does he do?=> He’s a teacher. + Where does he work?=> He works at a high school. Name. Age. Tom. 26. Susan 19 Bill. 20. Job Teacher Journalist Nurse. Place of work At a high school For a magazine. In a hospital. - Ask Ss some questions about their families, such as: What does your father do? Where does he work? What does your mother do? Do you have any brothers / sisters? How old is he/ she? …… - Remark and give mark.. - Exlpain the aim of the exercise and ask Ss to do. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read the completed sentences in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers.. - Answer T’s questions.. - Write new lesson. - Listen and do exercise. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Read completed sentences. - Listen and copy.. - Ask Ss to look at the form in the books. - Have Ss guess the information of three people. Open prediction. - Look at the forms.. - Call on some groups to give their predictions. - Play the tape for Ss 2 times to check their prediction. - Ask Ss to fill in the forms. - Call on some Ss to give the results in front of the class.. - Give the prediction. - Listen to the tape and check.. - Guess the information.. - Fill in the forms..

(60) 3. Consolidation:7ms - Have Ss write about 3 people in the forms.. 4. Homework: 5ms - Do exercise 3,4 at page 16,17 in workbook.. - Play the tape again for Ss to check. - Correct and give the correct answers:. - Listen again and check.. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes. - Ask Ss to exchange the writings with the partners. - call on some Ss to read in front of the class.. - Work in pairs.. - Prepare part B5,6. - Write homework.. - Copy down.. - Listen. - Write about 3 people. - Exchange the writing. - Read aloud.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(61)

(62) UNIT 3 : AT HOME Lesson 5 : B – Hoa’s Family ( B 5,6). Period: 17 Date of prepared: 17/ 09/2016 Date of teaching : 7A: 22/ 09/2016 7B: 22/ 9/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: After the lesson, Ss will be able to use comparatives and superatives of irregular adjectives and long adjectives . They can use them fluently and apply in the life. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to use comparatives and superatives of irregular adjectives and long adjectives . They can use them fluently and apply in the life. 1. Vocabulary: - Apartment - Furnished - Advice - Suitable - Empty - Good=> better => the best 2. Grammar: Structures: - S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2 - S + tobe + the most + adj.. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. Where does he work? What does your mother do? Do you have any brothers / sisters? How old is he/ she?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up: 5 mins - Greetings. - Greetings. - Have Ss play a game : Guess - Have Ss play a game : Guess - Play a game: the jobs. the jobs. + You go to this person when + You go to this person when + Dentist..

(63) you have a toothache. + This person writes for a newspaper or magazine. + Before a house is built , this person draws the plan for it. + This person grows vegetables and raises cattle. …. 2. New activities: 38 mins a) Listen and read: + Apartment (n)= Flat : căn hộ + Advice (n) : lời khuyên + Empty (adj) >< trống rỗng + Furnished ( adj) : đồ đạc trong nhà + Suitable (adj) : phù hợp + Good => better=> the best: tốt - tốt hơn - tốt nhất Structures: + Comparatives of long adjectives S1 + tobe + more + adj + than + S2 EX: She is more beautiful than her sister. + Superlatives of long adjectives: S + tobe + the most + adj . EX: He is the most intelligent.. you have a toothache. + This person writes for a newspaper or magazine. + Before a house is built , this person draws the plan for it. + This person grows vegetables and raises cattle. …. - Remark and give marks.. + Journalist + Architect + Farmer. - Write new lesson. a) Listen and read: - Introduce the content of the lesson to Ss . - Explain some new words:. - Listen. - Listen and write. - Guess the meanings . - Read in chorus and individually.. - Make sentences.. - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find the answers for the questions. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class.. - Listen to the tape. - Work in pairs. - Practice reading .. - Find the answers . - Work in pairs. - Practice asking and answering..

(64) Correct and give the answer key: a. The one at number 27 b. The one at number 79 c. The one at number 79 d. The one at number 27.. b) Write.. 3. Consolidation: 1 minute - Ask Ss to look at the remember and read . - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Have Ss make sentences with them. 4. Homework: 1 minute - Learn by heart new words and structures by making sentences with them. - Do exercises 2,3 at page 16,17 in workbook. - Prepare language focus .. - Correct and give the answer key: a. The one at number 27 b. The one at number 79 c. The one at number 79 d. The one at number 27. The most suitable apartment is the smallest but it is the newest of the three apartments. It has two bedrooms, a large modern bathroom and a kitchen. b) Write. - Introduce the situation of the lesson. - Ask Ss to read the letter . - Have Ss use the given words in the box in order to complete the letter. - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read the completed letter aloud. - Correct and give the correct answer.. - Listen and copy.. - Listen. - Read the letter. - Complete the letter. - Exchange the result with the partner. - Read the letter aloud. - Copy the letter in the notebooks.. - Read . - Make sentences. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(65) Period: 18. Language focus 1- 4.

(66) Date of prepared: 24/ 09/2016 Date of teaching : 7A: 27/ 09/2016 7B: 27/ 9/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: After the lesson,Ss do exercises in order to review the structures and grammar which they have been learnt from unit 1 to unit 3 . From that they will use them fluently and apply them in the life. 1. Knowledge: By the end of the lesson, Ss do exercises in order to review the structures and grammar which they have been learnt from unit 1 to unit 3 . From that they will use them fluently and apply them in the life. - Present simple tense. - Future simple tense. - Ordinal numbers. - Comparatives and superlatives. - Prepositions of place. - Occupations.. 2. Skills :Reading and writing 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. Questions about knowledges of lesson.. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times T’s activities Ss’ activities 1. Warm up: 7 mins - Greetings. - Greetings. - Ask Ss some questions - Ask Ss some questions about - Answer T’s questions. about their health, families. their health, families. 2. Consolidation and practice: (1) Present simple tense: 5 mins. 2. Consolidation and practice: (1) Present simple tense: - Ask Ss to repeat the use of the - Do exercise. present simple tense..

(67) - Ask Ss to repeat the use of the present simple tense. - Ask them to do exercise 1: Complete the passage using the verbs in brackets. (2) Future simple tense:10 mins Have Ss play a game: Noughts and crosses. - Ask them to do exercise 1: Complete the passage using the verbs in brackets. - Have Ss exchange the result - Exchange the result with the partner. with the partner. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Read aloud. - Correct and give the correct answers. (2) Future simple tense: - Have Ss play a game: Noughts - Play a game. and crosses. EX: He will go to the post - Make sentences. office. He won’t call Ba. - Remark. (3) Ordinal number: 7mins (3) Ordinal number: - Ask Ss to write the correct - Ask Ss to write the correct - Write ordinal numbers. ordinal numbers. ordinal numbers. - Call on 2 Ss to go to the board - Go to the board and and write. write. - Correct if necessary. (4) Prepositions:7mins (4) Prepositions: mins - Have Ss look at the - Have Ss look at the pictures in - Look at the pictures pictures in the book and use the book and use the carefully and write. the prepositions in the box to prepositions in the box to write write the positions of the cat. the positions of the cat. - Call on some Ss to speak - Call on some Ss to speak - Speak aloud. aloud. aloud. - Correct and give the - Correct and give the correct - Copy. correct answers; answers; a. It’s in front of the chair. a. It’s in front of the chair. c. It’s behind the TV. c. It’s behind the TV. d. It’s next to the bookshelf. d. It’s next to the bookshelf. e. It’s on the couch. e. It’s on the couch. 3. Further practice:7mins 3. Further practice: - Give some cues then ask Ss - Give some cues then ask Ss to to make sentences. make sentences. + Sydney / big / Australia. + Tokyo / expensive / World. + He / good student / class..

(68) Go post office. Call Ba. Read book. Tidy yard See movie 4. Consoidation: Watch TV 1 min 4. Consoidation: 1 min - Retell main points - Retell the main points Meetthe Minh Write Do housework Grandmother5. Homework: 1 min 5. Homework: 1 min - Do test yourself in - Do test yourself in workbook. workbook. - Review for the next lesson. - Review for the next lesson.. - Make sentences. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(69) Period:. 19. Language focus 5- 8. Date of prepared: 24/ 09/2016 Date of teaching : 7A: 28/ 09/2016.

(70) 7B: 28/ 9/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss do exercises in order to review the structures and grammar which they have been learnt from unit 1 to unit 3 . From that they will use them fluently and apply them in the life. 1. Knowledge: - Present simple tense. - Future simple tense. - Ordinal numbers. - Comparatives and superlatives. - Prepositions of place. - Occupations.. 2. Skills :Reading and writing 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. Questions about knowledges of lesson.. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times T’s activities Ss’ activities 1. Warm up: 7 mins 1. Warm up: 7 mins - Ask sts retell the old grammar. - Answer T’s questions. 2. Consolidation and practice: 2. Consolidation and 38 mins practice: 38 mins (5) Adjectives: (5) Adjectives: - Ask Ss to look at the pictures a) A is a cheap toy. B is and use the adjectives in the - Do exercise. cheaper. C is the cheapest. box to make sentences about b) A is an expensive dress. B comparatives and superlatives. is more expensive. - Call on some Ss to go to the C is the most expensive. board and write down. - Go to the board and write ……. - Correct and give the correct Make sentences. answers: (6) Occupations: (6) Occupations: - Have Ss play a game : Lucky.

(71) 1. LN 2. He fights fires. He is very brave. What is his job? 3. She works in a school. She teaches students. what is her job? 4. He lives in the countryside. He grows vegetables and raises cattle. What’s his job? 5. LN. 6. She works in a hospital. She makes people well. What’s her job? 7. He works in a factory. He repairs machines . What’s his job? 8. LN (7) Is there a….?/ Are there any…?. (8) Question words:. 3. Further practice: + Sydney / big / Australia. + Tokyo / expensive / World. + He / good student / class. 4. Consoidation: 1 min - Retell the main points 5. Homework: 1 min. numbers.. (7) Is there a….?/ Are there any…? - Have Ss look at the picture then complete the sentences. - Have Ss work in pairs. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct if necessary. - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks. (8) Question words: - Ask Ss to look at the form then ask and answer the information about Pham Trung Hung. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct and ask them to write down.. - Play game.. - Do exercise.. - Practice copy. - Ask and answer. - Practice. - Copy. - Give some cues then ask Ss to make sentences. _- Practice.. - Listen, retell..

(72) - Do test yourself in workbook. - prepare for the test.. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(73) Period: 20. The written test: 45 minutes Date of prepared: 02/10/2017 Date of teaching : 7A,B: 03/10/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I .The aims. 1.Knowledge: After the test sts will be able to: - Develop their listening skills by listening the passage then fill correct word in the gap and choose the correct option. - Use the grammar and vocab they have learnt do exercises - Read the passage and answer the questions. - Answers about themselve and write the exclamation . 2.Skills: 4 skills 3. Attitude: Students like learning english and use the grammar they have learnt todo exercises in the test 4. Abitity and quality: Help students self - confident, self-aware do the text II. Language contents. 1. Grammar : - The simple tense - The simple future - Exclamation - Adj: comparatives and superlatives.

(74) - Preposition 2.Vocabulary : Review III. Evaluation plan. - Exercises, comments. - Time: After lecture IV. Teaching aids . - Photocopied paper of the text, pen,…….. V. Content of the text Give each sts a paper aske sts to do it carefully Time: 45’ A.Ma trận đề kiểm tra Nội dung Nhận biết Thông hiểu TN I.Listening Số câu : 8 Số điểm: 2 Tỷ lệ: 20%. II. Vocab Số câu : 4 Số điểm: 1 Tỷ lệ10%. TL. Vận dụng. TN. TL. Thấp TL. Listen and choose the correct answer 4c 1đ. Listen and complete the answer. Cộng Cao TL 8c 2đ. 4c 1đ 4c. Choose the (noun),(pre), (adj), (verb) 4c 1đ III.Language - The simple Số câu : 8 tense Số điểm: 2 - The simple Tỷ lệ: 20% future - Adj: comparatives and superlatives - Preposition 8c 2đ. 1đ. 8c 2đ.

(75) IV.Reading Số câu : 8 Số điểm: 2 Tỷ lệ: 20%. -Read the passage and answer the questions. -Read the passage and answer true or false. 4c. 4c 1đ. 8c 2đ. 1đ. V.Writing Số câu : 6 Số điểm: 3 Tỷ lệ: 30%. -Answer the questions -Write exclamst ions 4c. -Translate 6c the sentences in to El 3đ 2c 1đ. 2đ Tổng Số câu : 34 Số điểm: 10 Tỷ lệ: 100%. 12c. 16c 3đ. 6c 4đ. 34c 3đ. 10đ. I. Listen. (2pts) * Listen and complete the answers: 1. What’s her name? Her name is............................................................................... 2. How old is she? She is........................................................................................... 3. What does she do? She is ...................................................................................... 4.Where does she live? She lives in a.......................................................................... *Listen and choose the correct answer. Her father is a (5)….....He is 40. He works in a (6)……. in Ha Noi. Her mother is a teacher. She is (7)……. She teaches in a Primary School. Her (8)………..is only eight and he is a student. 5. A. doctor B. worker C. farmer D.journalist 6. A. school B. hospital C. factory D. farm 7. A. 35 B. 36 C. 37 D. 38 8. A. friend B. sister C. aunt D. brother II.Language focus. (2 pts) * Circle the best words A,B,C or D to complete the sentences. 1. I live …………….. Tran Hung Dao Street. A.in B. on C. at D. of 2. Mai ………………. to the city tomorrow..

(76) A.go B. goes C. going D. will go 3. He …………….. in Ha Noi with his parents. A. lives B. to live C. living D. live 4. Huong is ……………………. than Minh. A. tall B. taller C. tallest D. the tall est 5. A…………………….. takes care of sick people. A.farmer B. teacher C. doctor D. journalist 6. Ho Chi Minh city is………………….city in Viet Nam. A. big B. bigger C. biggest D. the biggest 7. Will he be free tonight?. A. No, he won’t B. No, he isn't C. No, he doesn’t D. No, he will 8. …………. is it from your house to the market? A. How long B. How far C. How many D.How III. Vocabulary (1pt) 1. Em hãy khoanh tròn vào chữ cái đứng trước danh từ. A. tall B. short C. thin D. doctor 2. Em hãy khoanh tròn vào chữ cái đứng trước giới từ A. am B. are C. to D. is 3. Em hãy khoanh tròn vào chữ cái đứng trước tính từ A. house B. beautiful C.restaurant D. movie 4. Em hãy khoanh tròn vào chữ cái đứng trước động từ A. invite B. week C.month D. year IV. Read the passage carefully. Then answer the following questions. (2pts) Nga lives in Pac Nam with her parents.She is a student in Nghien Loan secondary school. Her telephone number is 8 266 567. She will be 14 on her next birthday, October 11th. She will have a small party for her birthday. She will invite some of her best friends. They will eat cakes and candies. They will have a lot of fun. The party will start at seven and finish at ten in the evening. * Answer questions: 1.Where does Nga live? 2. Does she live with her parents? 3. What’s her telephone number? 4. What time will the party start? * Answer True(T) or False (F): 5. Nga is a student in Nghien Loan secondary school. 6. Her telephone number is 8 266 557 7. On her next birthday she will be 14 8. She will invite a lot of her friends. V.Writing(3pts) *Answer the questions about you. 1 .How far is it from your house to school? 2. How do you go to school? *Write exclamations with “ what”. 3. bad movie.

(77) 4. expensive books * Translate the sentences into English. 5.Bố của tôi là một bác sĩ 6.Ông ấy làm việc ở một bệnh viện. C.The key: I.Listening Listen and write the correct word. Tổng điểm: 2 điểm, trong đó mỗi ý đúng được 0,25 điểm 1. Lan. 2. 12 years old. 3. a student. 4. Small village 5. B 6.C 7.A 8.D II. Tổng điểm: 2 điểm, trong đó mỗi ý đúng được 0,25 điểm 1.B 2.D 3.A 4.B 5.C 6.D 7.A 8.B III.Tổng điểm: 1 điểm, trong đó mỗi ý đúng được 0,25 điểm 1. D 2. C 3. B 4. A IV.Reading * Answer questions .Tổng điểm: 1 điểm, trong đó mỗi ý đúng được 0,25 điểm 1. Nga lives in Pac Nam 2. Yes, she does 3. Her telephone number is 8 266 567. 4. The party will start at seven * Answer True(T) or False (F). Tổng điểm: 1 điểm, trong đó mỗi ý đúng được 0,25 điểm 5.T 6.F 7.T 8.F V.Tổng điểm: 3 điểm, trong đó mỗi ý đúng được 0,5 điểm 1.It’s ……………………………..kilometer(s) 2.I go to school by ……………………… 5.What a lovely house! 4.What expensive books! 5. My father is a doctor 6. He works in a hospital Tape Her name is Lan. She is 12 years old. She is a student. She lives in a small village not far from Ha Noi with her father, mother and her younger brother- Nam. Her father is a worker.He is 40. He works in a factory in Ha Noi. Her mother is a teacher. She is 35. She teaches in a Primary School. Her brother 8 and he is a student..

(78)

(79) Full name: ……………………………… Class : 7……….. Written test: 45 minutes Mark. Teacher’s remarks. I. Listen. (2pts) * Listen and complete the answers: 1. What’s her name? Her name is............................................................................... 2. How old is she? She is......................................................................................... 3. What does she do? She is ...................................................................................... 4.Where does she live? She lives in a.......................................................................... *Listen and choose the correct answer. Her father is a (5)….....He is 40. He works in a (6)……. in Ha Noi. Her mother is a teacher. She is (7)……. She teaches in a Primary School. Her (8)……….. eight and he is a student. 5. A. doctor B. worker C. farmer D.journalist 6. A. school B. hospital C. factory D. farm 7. A. 35 B. 36 C. 37 D. 38 8. A. friend B. sister C. aunt D. brother II.Language focus. (2 pts) * Circle the best words A,B,C or D to complete the sentences..

(80) 1. I live …………….. Tran Hung Dao Street. A.in B. on C. at D. of 2. Mai ………………. to the city tomorrow. A.go B. goes C. going D. will go 3. He …………….. in Ha Noi with his parents. A. lives B. to live C. living D. live 4. Huong is ……………………. than Minh. A. tall B. taller C. tallest D. the tall est 5. A…………………….. takes care of sick people. A.farmer B. teacher C. doctor D. journalist 6. Ho Chi Minh city is………………….city in Viet Nam. A. big B. bigger C. biggest D. the biggest 7. Will he be free tonight?. A. No, he won’t B. No, he isn't C. No, he doesn’t D. No, he will 8. …………. is it from your house to the market? A. How long B. How far C. How many D.How III. Vocabulary (1pt) 1. Em hãy khoanh tròn vào chữ cái đứng trước danh từ. A. tall B. short C. thin D. doctor 2. Em hãy khoanh tròn vào chữ cái đứng trước giới từ A. am B. are C. to D. is 3. Em hãy khoanh tròn vào chữ cái đứng trước tính từ A. house B. beautiful C.restaurant D. movie 4. Em hãy khoanh tròn vào chữ cái đứng trước động từ A. invite B. week C.month D. year IV. Read the passage carefully. Then answer the following questions. (2pts) Nga lives in Pac Nam with her parents.She is a student in Xuan La secondary school. Her telephone number is 8 266 567. She will be 14 on her next birthday, October 11th. She will have a small party for her birthday. She will invite some of her best friends. They will eat cakes and candies. They will have a lot of fun. The party will start at seven and finish at ten in the evening. * Answer questions: 1.Where does Nga live? …………………………………………………………………………………… 2. Does she live with her parents? …………………………………………………………………………………… 3. What’s her telephone number? …………………………………………………………………………………… 4. What time will the party start? …………………………………………………………………………………… * Answer True(T) or False (F): 5. Nga is a student in Xuan La secondary school. 6. Her telephone number is 8 266 557.

(81) 7. On her next birthday she will be 14 8. She will invite a lot of her friends. V.Writing(3pts) *Answer the questions about you. 1 .How far is it from your house to school? …………………………………………………………………………………… 2. How do you go to school? ………………………………………………………………………………….. *Write exclamations with “ what”. 3. bad movie ………………………………………………………………………………… 4. expensive books …………………………………………………………………………………… * Translate the sentences into English. 5.Bố của tôi là một bác sĩ …………………………………………………………………………………… 6.Ông ấy làm việc ở một bệnh viện …………………………………………………………………….

(82)

(83) Date of planning 2/10/2017. Date of teaching 7A 04/10/2017. 7B 04/10/2017. Period 21. Correcting the test. Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. Objectives. 1. Knowledge: After the lesson, Ss will be able to know about the common mistakes and their knowledge , from that they will know how to improve their knowledge of English. 2. Skills: 4 skills. 3. Attitude: Students like learning english and use the grammar they have learnt todo exercises in the test 4. Abitity and quality: Help students self - confident, self-aware use the grammar to do again the test II. Language contents. 1.Vocabulary: 2.Grammar: present tense, comparative, future tens, exclamation... III. Evaluation plan. - By observation, exercises, comments. - Time: During and after lectures IV. Teaching aids. Test papers, chalk, board. V. Procedures..

(84) T and Ss’ activities 1. Warm-up.(4’) T: asks Ss to comment the 45 minutes by themselves. Ss: comment. 2. Presentation.(12’) T: asks Ss to retell the simple present And give example Ss: Retell and give example T: comments and gives the corrects answer Ss: take note and check their tests - Ask Ss to repeat the grammar and give examples + Repeat and give examples - Check and correct. 1. The simple present tense. S + V/ Vs,es……………… Ex : I go to school She goes to school. 3. Practice. (23) - Read the listening to sts + Listen and do exercise again - Call sts to give answers + Answer - Correct. * KEYS I.Listening 1. Lan. 3. a student. 5. B 6.C 8.D. + Do again the exercise - Call some of them to give answers + Give answers - Correct + Copy +Read the words and give answers - Correct + Read the passage and choose the correct answers _ Call sts to give answers + Give answers - Correct - Ask sts to do again - Call sts go to the board and write the. Contents. 2. The future simple. S + will/ won’t + V-infi……………. Ex : I will play voleyball this afternoon 3.Adjectives + Comparatives + Superlatives. 2. 12 years old. 4. Small village 7.A. II. Language 1.B 2.D 3.A 4.B 5.C 6.D 7.A 8.B III. Vocab 1. D 2. C 3. B 4. A IV.Reading 1. Nga lives in Pac Nam 2. Yes, she does 3. Her telephone number is 8 266 567. 4. The party will start at seven 5.T 6.F 7.T 8.F V. Writing.

(85) answers + Write - Correct the answers + Copy in the book. 1.It’s ……………………kilometer(s) 2.I go to school by ……………………… 5.What a lovely house! 4.What expensive books! 5. My father is a doctor 6. He works in a hospital. 4. Consolidation. (4’ -Retell the gammar 5. Home work.(1’) + Learn grammar do again exercises in the test + Prepare unit4 A1,2 VI. Learning by experience. ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………… ………………………………………………………………………………………….

(86) Period: 26. TEST CORRECTION. Date of prepared: 24/ 09/2016 Date of teaching : 7A: 29/ 09/2016 7B: 29/ 9/2017 Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Sts will be able to understand and correct the mistakes in their test 1. Knowledge: - Present simple tense. - Future simple tense. - Ordinal numbers. - Comparatives and superlatives. - Prepositions of place. - Occupations.. 2. Skills :Reading and writing 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. Questions about knowledges of lesson.. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: VI. Answers Key: I - Listen, then complete the dialogue (2.5 pts) A. Complete the dialogue. (1.5 pts). Mai is (1)12 She will be 13 on Sunday, May 25th. She will have a party for her (2) birthday. She will (3) invite some of her friends. She lives at (4) 24 Tran Hung Dao Street. The party will be at her (5) home. It will start at six o’clock in the evening and finish at (6) nine. B. True or False: (1.0 pt). 7. She will be 13 on Sunday 8. She will invite alots of her friends 9. The party will be at her home 10. It will start at five o’clock. True T. False F. T F.

(87) II. Language Focus: (2.5pts) A. Vocabulary (1.0pt). 11. Circle two adjective: (khoanh tròn 2 tính từ) B. nice C. tall 12. Circle two Wh- questions: (khoanh tròn hai từ có Wh để hỏi) B. Where D. Why 13. Circle two prepositions: (khoanh tròn 2 giới từ ) A. Behind D. under 14. Circle two plural Nouns: (khoanh tròn 2 danh từ số nhiều) C. schools D. children B. Choose the best answer (A, B, C or D) to complete the following sentences. (1.5). 15.A. 16.C. 17.C. 18. C. 19.A. 20.C. III. Read the passage, and then answer the questions: (2.5 pts) A. Answer the questions (1.5 pts) 21. She is from Bac Kan 22. She is a student. 23. She lives with her uncle and aunt in Ha Noi B. True or False (1.0pt) True 24. Lan has lots of friends in Bac Kan T 25. She is a student in class 7B 26. She is happy 27. She misses her parents and her friends T V. Writing: (2.5pts) A. Arrange the suggested words in order (1.5 pts) 28. What is your family name? 29. What is your telephone number? 30. Nam is taller than me. B. Write exclamations. Use: Boring party, Beautiful day. (1.0 pt) 31. What a boring party. 32. What a beautiful day. E. HOME WORK: - Teacher asks students prepare for the next lesson. False F F.

(88)

(89) Period: 22. Date of planning 2/10/2017. Date of teaching 7A 05/10/2017. 7B 05/10/2017. UNIT 4 : AT SCHOOL Lesson 1: A – Schedules ( A1,2,3 ). Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson, The sts will review the way of speaking the time and some subjects at school. Ss will practice listening for details about subjects and time. II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: Review : - The simple present tense. - Vocabulary about subjects at school.. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. What is lan studying ? What time does Lan/she have her physics class ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times T’s Activities 1. Warm up :7 mins . - Have ss play a game : Slap the board 2. New activities:33 mins a) Listen and repeat:. Ss’ Activities - Play a game in 2 groups..

(90) - Remark and demonstrate the group which wins the game.. - Have Ss read after the tape. - Call on some Ss to read aloud. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the time. - Ask Ss to repeat the questions - Call on some pairs to practice in about asking the time. front of the class - Have Ss look at the clocks in the ( exchange the roles) book. - remark. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about them. - Ask Ss to look at the book and - Make model with a student: listen to the tape. - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Remark and ask them to write the answers in the notebooks. b) Answer about you: - Ask Ss to look at the schedule T: What time do you get up? then explain the aim of the S : I get up at 6 o’clock. exercise. T: What time do classes start? - Have Ss guess the missing S : They start at 7 o’ clock. subjects and time. - Call on some Ss to give their prediction. c) Listen and write. Complete the - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and schedule. compare their prediction. - Ask Ss to copy down. - Play the tape again and ask Ss to Friday write the missing subjects and 7:00 7:50 8:40 time. 9:40 10:30 - Have Ss exchange the results English Georaphy Music with the partners. Physics History - Play the tape again for Ss to Saturday check the results. 1:00 2:40 3:40 - Ask Ss to give the answers. 4:30 - Correct and give the correct Physical education Math answer. English Physics - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the time of the subjects on Friday and Saturday . 3. Consolidation:3 mins EX: What time do they have - Repeat the way of speaking the English on Friday ? times and subjects at school. They have English at 7:00 - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if 4. Homework:2 mins. - Write new lesson. - Give the questions. - Look at the clocks in the book. - Listen to the tape. - Read after the tape. - Read aloud. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Write down. - Listen. - Guess. - Give the prediction. - Listen to the tape and check. - Listen to the tape and write. - Exchange the results. - Listen again and check. - Give the answer. - Listen and write. - Work in pairs..

(91) - Do exercise 1,2 in workbook. - Prepare part A4,5.. necessary. - Practice in front of the class. - Speak aloud. - Write homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(92)

(93) Date of planning 4/10/2017 Period: 23. Date of teaching 7A 06/10/2017. 7B 06/10/2017. UNIT 4: AT SCHOOL Lesson 2: A – Schedules ( A- 4, 5). Organization : 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson, Ss can speak to each other about the schedule and practice the present continuous tense. II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: - Review: + Vocabulary about subjects at school. + The present continuous tense. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. What is lan studying ? What time does Lan/she have her physics class ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times Teacher’s Activities Students’ Activities 1. Warm up: 7 mins - Have Ss play a game: Networks - Greetings. play a game: Networks - Play a game in 2 - Call on 2 Ss from 2 groups groups. to go to the board and write down. - Remark. - Go to the board and write. 2. New activities: 34 mins.

(94) a. Look at the pictures. Ask and answer questions. - Ask Ss to look at 6 pictures carefully and call the names of these subject - Explain new word : + Physics + music Physical education (n) + Geography + math - Call on some students to + English speak about the pictures + Physical education - Correc and give the correct answers - Have Ss look at the clocks - Make model with a student and tell the time T : What is lan studying ? - Have Ss work in pairs S : She is studyng physics asking and answering about T : What time does Lan/she have these people her physics class ? S : She has her physics class at 8:40 - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct if necessary - Ask Ss to write into the b. Listen and read notebooks. English , math , geography, physical education, music - Play the tape for Ss then explain the structure + When do you have English ? I have English classes on Wednesday and Thursday + What is your favorite subject ? I like math. + When does Thu have E classes ? + What time do they start ? + What orther classes does Thu have on Thursday ? + What ‘s Thu’s favorite. - Introduce the dialogue to Ss - Ask Ss some questions about their schedules - Ask Ss to guess what subjects Hoa and Thu have on Thursday - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check their guess - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers: - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class. - Look at the picture crafully. - Speaks about the pictures. - Tell the time of each clock - Work in pairs - Listen carefully. - Practice in front of the class - Write down. - Listen. - Answer the questions. - Guess. - Give the answers. - Look at the books and listen to the tape. - Give the answers.. - Listen..

(95) subject ? Why ? + What ‘s Hoa’s favorite subject ? Why ?. - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to answer some questions about the dialogue. - Work in pairs. - Practice in front of the class. - Answer the questions.. + Civic education (n) : + Fine arts (n) : + Biology (n) : + Chemistry (N) : + Techmplogy (n) : + Elective subject : 3. Consolidation:4 mins When do we have……….? What is your favorite subject? 4. Homework:1minute - Do exercise 3,4 at page 22& 23 in workbook.. - Correct the mistakes if necessary - Have Ss write their scheducles in the notebooks - Introduce some more subject to Ss - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about their schedule - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes - Repeat the subjects at school and structures: - Learn by heart new words and structures. - Write the schdules in the exercise book.. - Write schedules in the notebook. - Work in pairs. - Practice speaking in front of the class. - Listen carefully.. - Write homework..

(96) Period:. 23. Unit 4 : At school Lesson 3 : A - Schedules (6,7). Date of prepared: 13/ 10/2016 Date of teaching : 14/ 10/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to speak about the difference between two persons or two things. The students will know about the difference betweet schools in the USA and Viet Nam. Practice reading skill II. Language content: I. The aims: By the end of the lesson, Ss can speak to each other about the schedule and practice the present continuous tense. 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary: - Uniform (n) - A 20-minute break (n) - Cafeteria (n) - Snack (n) - Popular (adj) - After - school activity (n) Grammar Structure : Tobe different form…. Reciew: the present simple tense. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Which country has capital city as Washington DC ? + What do you think about the USA?.

(97) III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. Contents,times 1. Warm up : 6 mins + How many classes do you have today ? + What are they ? + What ‘s your favorite subject ? + When do you have English ? + What time do they start ? 2. New activites : (37 mins) a.Read *Pre- reading : + Which country has capital city as Washington DC ? + What do you think about the USA? + School uniform (n) : + A_20_minute break : + Cafetesia (n) : + Snack (n) + Popular (adj) >< unpopular + After_school activity : * Checking technique: Rub out and remember *While_reading : a: T b:F c:F d:T e:F f:F. T’s activities - Ask Ss some questions  Remark and give marks. Ss’activities - Answer T’S questions I have….. They are….. I like….. I have…… They start at …. - Write new lesson - Answer T’s question Ask Ss some questions in order to load in new lesson : - USA  “Today we ‘ll learn about schools in the USA , before reading the text I ‘ll explain < The students ca answer some new words for you” their opinions in V Namese> - Listen carefully - Guess the meanings - Have Ss do exercise : True - Read new words in churs or False ( in the text book ) and individually their copy down < using sub_board> - Ask Ss to guess the information - Call on some represintatives to give their - Play a game predicitions in front of the - Do exercise in groups class - Ask Ss to look at the text and listen to the tape their check their predictions.

(98) *Post-reading :. b. Play with words. + Home economics + The word changes + Rivers and mountains ranges + Several. 3. Consolidation : 1 minute. 4. Homework : 1 minute - Do exercise 4 at page 23 in workbook - Prepare B1,2.. - Call on some Ss to give - Give the prediction their answers - Correct on give the correct answers - Listen to the tape & check the prediction - Call on some Ss to read - Give the answers the text aloud. - Copy down Correct their pronuniation - Ask Ss to discuss in - Read the text aloud groups about the difference between shools in the USA - Work in groups and school in Vnam - Call on some - Demonstrate their ideas represontatives to demonstrate their ideas - Summarize the ideas of - Listen the groups - Remark - Play the tape for Ss - Listen to the tape - Explain some new words - Read in chours and individually, then aopy down - Play the tape - Read after the tape - Call on some Ss to read after the tape - Read loudly - Call on some Ss to read aloud - Repeat the details about - Listen and remember the schools in the USA and VN - Repeat new words and structures - Write home work - Learn by heart new words & structure by making sentences with them - Make sentences with the part remember.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ Period : 24. Unit 4 : At school.

(99) Lesson 4 : B- The library (1,2) Date of prepared: 10/ 10/2017 Date of teaching : 7A,B: 12/ 10/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. 7A............../33 students; Absent’ students: ........................... 7B............../34 students; Absent’ students: ........................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , the students will read the text to understand the details and practice library vocabulary & prepositions of positions II. Language content: 1. The aims: By the end of the lesson , the students will read the text to understand the details and practice library vocabulary & prepositions of positions 1. Knowledge: 1. Vocabulary : - Rack (n) - Shelf (n)  Shelves - Science books (n) - Dictionary (n) - Chemistry (n) - Biology (n) - Literature in Viet names(n) - Reader(n) - Reference book (n) - Novel (n) - At the back of (pre) 2. Grammar : The structure : - Where can I find the math books, please? - Do you have newspapers and magazines here? Review : The present simple tense .. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commination, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the repressibility with themselves.. II- Questions:. + Which country has capital city as Washington DC ? + What do you think about the USA?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss some questions - After the lesson by giving some tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan .. V. Procedure: Contents, times 1. Warm up : 6 mins - Have Ss play a game : Jumbled words. T’s activities - Have students work in groups. Ss’activities - Greetings - Play a game.

(100) ilEngsh Bkoo. Hisryto Mtha. sycPhys. 2. New activities: 37 mins a. Listen and read: + Does your school have the library ? + What is the usefulness of library ? + What do you usually do when you go to the library ? + Who can help you find the books in the library ? + Rack (n): giá đỡ + Shelf (n)  Shelves : giá sách + Science books : sách khoa học + Dictionary (n) : từ điển + Novel (n) tiểu thuyết + Reference books : sách tham khảo + At the back of : phía sau + Reader (n) sách đọc thêm. - Call on 2 representatives to go to the board and write down - Correct & remark - Work in groups - Ask Ss to look at the - 2 students go to the picture and guess board & write - Ask Ss some questions + What is it in the picture ? + Where do you usually see it ?  Load in new lesson  Explain some new words : *Checking technique : - Ask Ss to play a game Slap the board < new words are written in the sub_road ) - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then do exercise : Grid : The library Opening time : Books on the left: Books on the right: Books in the English: Closing time: - Call on some Ss to go to the board and complete the table - Correct and give the correct answer - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation. - Look at the picture carefully - Listen and answer  Yes, it does ( Ss can answer the questions in Vnamese ). - Guess their meanings, read new words in chours and individually - Copy down in their notebooks. - Play game. - Look at the book and listen to the tape - Complete the table.

(101) - Ask Ss to look at the questions in the books then work in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions in front of the class - Correct the mistake if necessary b.Listen then practice with a - Introduce new lesson partner: - Play the tape for Ss and + Where can I find the math ask them to look at the books, please books + Do you have magazines here ? - Explain some new spapers structures :  They are on the shelves on the left / right H : Good morning - Ask Ss to make L : Good morning. Can I help questions and answers you ? - Correct the mistakes if H : Yes , where can I find the necessary books in English? - Have Ss read the L : They are at the back of the dialogue in pairs library - Call on some pairs to H : Do you have math and biology read the dialogue in front books here? of the class L : Yes, they have on the shelves - Correct their on the left pronunciation H : Thank you very much L : You are welcome. - Ask Ss to write sentences about their 3. Consolidation: 1 minute school library , using the library vocabulary Ask Ss to look at part B1 again - Call on some Ss to read then make the similar dialogue their writing in front of - Have Ss work in pairs the class - Remark. - Go to the board and write. 4. Home work : 1 minute - Prepare part 3,4,5. - Write home work. - Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them - Do exercise 1,2 at page. - Work in pairs - Read aloud - Work in pairs - Ask and answer loud a. Where are the magazines They are on the racks b. Where are the news spapers They are on the racks ……… - Listen to the teacher - Listen to the tape - Listen and write down - Make questions & answers - Work in pairs - Read the dialogue aloud - Look at B1 again - Work in pairs - Some pairs make dialogues - Write about the school library.

(102) 24 in work book. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period: 25. Unit 4 : At school.

(103) Lesson 5 : B- The library - 3, 4, 5 Date of prepared: 19/ 10/2016 Date of teaching : 20/ 10/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , the students will read the text to understand the details and practice library vocabulary & prepositions of positions II. Language content: 1. The aims: By the end of the lesson , the students will be able to know the information about one of the world’s largest libraries though the the text. They will review the prepositions of position and library vocabulary. 1. Knowledge: 1. Vocabulary - To receive (v) - To contain (v) - Employee (n) - Congress (n) 2. Grammar : - The present simple tense. 2. Skills :Reading and Listening. 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commination, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the repressibility with themselves.. II- Questions:. + Which country has capital city as Washington DC ? + What do you think about the USA?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss some questions - After the lesson by giving some tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times T’s activities Ss’ activities 1. Warm up: 7 ms - Have Ss play a game Play game: Noughts and Crosses - Greetings S1 : Where are the science books ? - Play a game S2 : They are on the sheklves on - Make example : the right - Remark and lead in new 2. New activities: 33 mins lesson - Play game in 2 a. Listen : Where are they ? groups.

(104) 1. Study 2. Science + math 3: Geography 4 + 5 : Newspapers and magazines 6+7 : English 8, Librarian’s desk. b. Read then answer * Pre- reading - Introduce the lesson then explain some new words + To receive (v) : + Compress (n) : + To contain (v) : + Employee (n) : 1. The library of Congress is in New york 2. It receives copies of all E books 3. There are over 100 million books in this library 4. The shelves are about 300 km long. 5. 5.000 people work in the library *While-reading 1-F 5-T 1–d 2 - Ln 3–e 4–b. 2-F. 3-T. 4–F. - Ask Ss to look at the chart in the library - Have Ss work in groups guessing the positions of the books in the library. - Call on some representatives to speak about the positions of books - Play the tape for Ss and ask them ti check their predictions <2times> - Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class - Play the tape again and check the answer - Give the correct answer : - Ask Ss to compare their predictions - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the positions of books. ( Make questions and answers). - Look at the chart carefully - Work in groups to discuss the postilion - Demonstrate their predictions - Listen to the tape - Give the results - Listen to the tape - Copy down. - Correct the mistakes - Compare the Checking technique : Rub predictions out and remember - Work in pairs - Ask Ss to do exercise : T or S1 : Where are E F prediction books ? - Ask some representatives S2 : They are on the to give their predictions shelves behind the librarian’s desk - Listen carefully - Ask Ss to look at the text, read in silent then check - Listen and copy their predictions down - Call on some Ss to give the answer - Guess meanings - Call on some students read read new words in the text in front of the class chorus and - Correct their individually pronunciations.

(105) 5 – LN 6–a 7–c. * Post_reading - Explain some new words : + To forget (v) : + Rocket (n) : + Space (n) : + Adventure (n) :. 3. Consolation : 3 minutes - Ask Ss look at the remember and use the phrases of prepositions and pronouns to make sentences.. - Ask Ss to look at the text again then find out the answers for the question - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers < The questions in the book > - Ask Ss to write the answers in their notebooks - Ask Ss to compare their school library with the library of Congress - Ask them to write the sentences Ex : My school library in smaller than the library of Congress <5> Play with words : - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the teacher - Ask Ss to read after the teacher - Call on some Ss to read the poem aloud - Correct their pronunciation. - Work in groups to predict - Give the predictions - Read the text in silent and check the predictions - Give the answers - Read the text aloud - Read the text and find the answers - Write the answers - Compare 2 library - Write down - Listen - Read after the teacher - Listen and write down. 4. Home work :1minute - Learn by heart new works by writing 3 lines for each - Do exercise 4 at page 26 in work book - Prepare Unit 5 part A1,. - Read aloud. - Listen carefully and make sentences. - Write home work.

(106) VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period:. 27. Unit 5 : Work and play Lesson 1 : A - In class ( A1). Date of prepared: 31/ 10/2016 Date of teaching : 01/ 11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students..

(107) Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: After the lesson, the students will be able to describe the work of a student at school and Ba’s activities at school and at home . They use the present simple tense to talk about school subject II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary - To learn about - Electronics - To use  how to use - To repair = to fix - To be omterested in - Household appliances - A map (n) - Drawing. - An experiment (n) - Artist - Computer science (n) - To be good at Grammar : - The present simple tense. 2. Skills :Reading and Listening. 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commination, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the repressibility with themselves.. II- Questions:. + How many days a week do you go to school ? + What time do you go to school ? + What time do classes start ? + How many subjects do you learn ? + What is your favorite subject ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss some questions - After the lesson by giving some tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. Contents, times T’s activities 1. Warm up : 6 mins + How many days a week - Greetings do you go to school ? - Ask Ss some questions + What time do you go to  Remark then lead in new lesson school ? + What time do classes start. Ss’ activities - Greetings - Answer T’s questions.

(108) ? + How many subjects do you learn ? + What is your favorite subject ? 2. New activities: 36 mins a. Listen and read: +to learn about (v) +to use  how touse +computer science(n):tin hoc +to be interested in : +A map(n): + An experiment:. - Listen carefully - Introduce the lesson,then explain some new words -checking techrique: What and WHERE - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape(2 times) - Have Ss read the text in silent - Call on some students to read the text aloud - Correct their pronunciation. - ask Ss to read the text again then fill in the grids - Ask Ss to exchange the results with their partners - Call on one student to go to the board and write down - Correct the mistake and give the correct answer. + To learn how to use a computer + To study maps and learn how about different countries + To do some experiments. 1)What time do your class start? 2) What do you learn at school? 3) What do you do in your. - Have Ss read the question and answer in the book - Ask Ss to make 5 questions and answers about Mai - Have Ss work in pairs - Call on some pairs to askand answer in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if necessary - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering about themselves,using the questions given - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Ask Ss to based on the. - guess meanings,read new words in chorus and individually,then copy down in the notebooks - Play game - Look at the books and listen to the tape - Read in silent - Read the text aloud - Complete the grids - Do individually. - Exchange the results - One students go to the board and writes - Write down. - Read aloud - make questions & answer - Work in pairs - Practice in front of the class - Work in pairs.

(109) computer science class? 4) What do you study in your geography class? 5) What do you do in your last lesson? 6)What time do your classes end? b. Read, then answer the questions.. questions to write a passage - Call on some student to read their writing Aloud - Remark - Practice aloud - Have Ss look at 2 pictures and answer the questions This is Ba. What is he doing ?. - Write a passage - read aloud. + Electronics (n) : + House hold appliances : + To repair (v) : + To be good at : + Drawing (n) : + Artist (n) : + To enjoy (v) : 1/ Ba enjoys his school very much 2/ His favorite subject is Electronics 3/ In this class he does some experiments 4/ He is’nt good at fixing things 5/ He can help his parents at home 6/ He never goes to art club 1–T 2–T 3–F 5–T 6–F * Questions :. a/ He likes Electionics best b/ Yes , he does. He enjoys school very much.  Introduce some new words : - Correct their pronunciation - Checking technique : Rub out and remember - Have Ss do exercise : T or F predicition - Have Ss work in groups - Call on some representatives to give their predictions - Ask Ss to read the text and check their predictions - Cal on some students to give the answers on front of the class - Correct and give the correct answers. - Look at the picture and answer the questions <Students can answer the questions in Vnamese if don’t know > P2 : He’s playing the guitar - Guess the meanings read new words in chorus and individually - Then copy down. - Play game. - Call on some Ss to read text aloud - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to read the text again to find out the answers for the questions - Have Ss work in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask and answer ion front of the class - Correct and give th answer key - About you :. - Work in groups - Give the prediction - Read the text & check the prediction - Give the answers in front of the class - Copy down - Read the text aloud.

(110) c/ He learns to repair house hold applicanes d/ He will able to fix his own appliances e/ Yes , he is . His drawings are very good. - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions about them selves - Make model : T : What do you do in your free time S : I play soccer T : What are you goot at ? S : I am good at drawing T : What is your favorite aubject ? S : My favorite subject is fine Arts - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if necessary - Ask Ss to make a survey: - Have Ss work in groups - Call on some representatives to tellabout members of their group.. 3. Consolidation: 2 mins - Ask Ss to make a survey: Name Favorite subject Good at Fretime activity Hoa Nam - Remark. 4. Homework: 1 min - learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each Asks Ss learn by heart new - write the passage in the words by writing 2 lines for each notebooks - write the passage in the - Do exercise 1,2 at page 27 notebooks in workbook - Prepare A2,3. - Read the text again to find out the answers - Work in pairs - Some pairs practice in front of the class - Copy down. - Work in pairs - Listen carefully. - Practice in front of the class - Make a survey. - Work in groups. - Give the results. - Write homework. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(111) Period: 28. Unit 5 : Work and play Lesson 2 : In class ( A 2, 3). Date of prepared: 02/ 11/2016 Date of teaching : 03/ 11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the class, Ss will be able to do a math question and they will listen a passage to find out the information II. Language content: I. The aims: By the end of the lesson, Ss can speak to each other about the schedule and practice the present continuous tense. 1. Knowledge: -. - To cost (v ) - Problem + The present continuous tense. - Right (adj ) - To erase (v). 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. What is lan studying ? What time does Lan/she have her physics class ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1. Warm up : 7 mins - Play a game : lucky numbers 1. What ‘s Ba ‘s favorite subject ? 2. Lucky number 3. Does Ba like other subject. T’s activities. Ss’ activities - Play a game.

(112) at school? 4. What does Ba learn to do in Electronics class ? 5. LN 6. Is Ba good at fixing things ? 7. What does Ba do in his freetime ? 8. LN 9. What’s your favorite subject ? 10.What do yo do in your freetime ? 2. New activities : 35 mins 1. Read. Then answer + To cost (v) : + Right (adj) : + Price (n) : + Proplem (n) : + To erase (v) :. 2. Listen then write correct letters next to names 3. Consolidation : 2 mins - Ask Ss some questions about themselves + What subjects do you like ? + When do you have math ? + Do you think math is difficult or easy ?. - Remark - 2 groups take part in the game. - Listen to the teacher. - Introduce the aims of the lesson : Read the dialogue then find out the answer for the question - Ask Ss to read the dialogue in silent - Explain some new words to Ss - Have Ss read new words in chorus and invidually - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Ask Ss to read the question and find out the answers - Call on some students to give the answers - Correct then give the correct answer  One banana costs 600 dong. - Read in silent - Read new words in chorus and individually, then copy down. - Work in pairs - Read the dialogue aloud - Read the question and find the answer - Give the answer - Copy down - Listen to the teacher - Call the names of subjects a/ Geography b/ Physical education c/ Computer science d/ Technology e/ Class activities - Guess in groups. - Give the predictions - Introduce the aims of the - Listen to the tape lesson - Ask Ss to look at the pictures - Listen and write down and call the names of sbject - Exchange the results.

(113) 4. Home work : 1 min - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each - Do exercise 3 at page 28 in workbook - Prepare part 5,6,7. - Listen to the tape and check - Ask Ss to guess what subject - Give the answers Ba and Hoa do on Saturday ? - Write down - Call on some Ss to give then predictions - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and choose the right subjects - Answer T’s questions Ba and Hoa do on Saturday - Play the tape again fod Ss - Answer T’s questions and ask them to write the letters next to the names - Have Ss exchange the results with their parents - Play the tape again for Ss to check their results - Write home work - Call on some Ss to give their answers - Correct and give the correct answers Ba : d,a,e Hoa : c,b,e - Have Ss answer the questions : + What subjects does Ba have on Saturday ? + What subjects does Hoa have on Saturday ? …….. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(114) Period:. 29. Unit 5 : Work and play Lesson 3 : A – In class (A 4,5,6,7) Date of prepared: 03/ 11/2016 Date of teaching : 04/ 11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to speak about subjects at school, what they study in each subject. They continue pratising reading skill II. Language content: I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to speak about subjects at school, what they study in each subject. They continue pratising reading skill 1. Knowledge:.

(115) Vocabulary : - Essay (n) - Past and present event - Author (n) - Graph (n) - Equation (n) - Globe (n) - Caculator (n) + The present continuous tense. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. +How many subjects do you study at school ? +What do you study in each subject ? +Which Subject do you like / dislike ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1. Warm up : 5 mins. 2. New activites : 34 mins <5> Read +How many subjects do you study at school ? +What do you study in each subject ? +Which Subject do you like / dislike ?. T’s activities - Have Ss play agame : Hangman : - Literature , History , English - Remark. Ss’activities - Greetings - Play a game. - Introduce the lesson to Ss - Ask Ss some questins such as ; Why ? - Listen to the teacher - Explain some new words for Ss - Answer T’s questions + essay (n) + past and present events (n) + author (n) - Have Ss read the passage in silent - Listen and write down - Call on some Ss to read the passage in front of the class - Correct the pronunciation. - Read the passage in silent.

(116) - Make some questions then ask Ss to answer + What do you study in / literature ? / history ? / Physics ? / Geography ? <6>Match each subject to - Have Ss work in pairs asking he correct items and answering the content of the + Literature : paitings passage + History : baseball games - Correct the mistakes + Science : Preposition - Have Ss look at the part of + English : England exercuse then explain the aims of exercise to Ss - Have Ss work in pairs reading and odding the words which are not suitable with each subject - Call on some students to give Explain some new words to the answers Ss - Correct the mistakes then give + Graphs (n) the correct answers + Equation (n) - Ask Ss some questions about + Caculator (n) the subjects + Globe (n) + What do you study in literature ? + Do you learn to play baseball <7> Play with words in history ? - Have Ss put some more words in the subjects - Remark - Explain the aims of the exercuse - Have Ss do exercise : Match each subject to the correct items - Have Ss exchange the result with their partner - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct the mistakes and give 3. Consolidation : 4 mins the correct answers Have Ss repeat about the - Ask Ss some questions such ubjects which they learnt as : Ask Ss to read the part What do you do in the P.E emember aloud. class ? What do you do in the Art class ?. - Read the passage in front of the class - Answer T’s questions. - Work in pairs - Listen to the teacher - Do exercise in pairs - Give the answers - Copy down. - Answer T’s questions. - Put some more words in the subjects - Listen to the teacher - Listen and write down - Read in chorus and individually - Do exercise - Exchange the result - Give the answers - Answer T’s questions - Work in pairs.

(117) 4. Home work : 1 min - Make sentences with part remember.. What do you learn in the math class ? - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions - Ask Ss to copy down the exercise - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the teacher - Have Ss read after the teacher - Call on some students to read in front of the class - Correct Ss’ pronunciation - Do exercise 4 at page 29 in work book - Prepare part B1,2. - Copy down - Listen to the teacher - Read after the teacher - Read in front of. - Repeat the subjects. - Write home work. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period: 30. Unit 5 : Work and play Lesson 4 : B - It’s time for recess (B1,2). Date of prepared : 07/11/2016 Date of teaching : 08/11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about activities at recess. They will practice reading and listening skills II. Language content: I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about activities at recess. They will practice reading and listening skills 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary : - To chat (v) - To ring (v).

(118) - To skip rope - Bell(n) - Blind man’s bhaff - Marbles - Catch (n) - Recess + The present continuous tense. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Where are the students ? + What are they doing ? + Do you like these games ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1. Warm up : 5 mins Ex : What do you learn in History class? We learn about past and present events 2. New activities : 34 mins <1> Listen and read : + Recess(n): nghỉ ngơi + Bell (n): chuông + Ring (v): reo + To chat (v): nói chuyện + To skip rope : nhảy dây + Bhind man’s bluff : bịt mắt bắt dê + Marbles (n) :bắn bi + Catch(n) : đuổi bắt. T’s activities - Ask Ss to make questions and answers ….. - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the questions + Where are the students ? + What are they doing ? + Do you like these games ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape . - Explain some new words to Ss ( Use pictures to introduce new wordds ) - Checking technique : What and where - Remark - Have Ss listen to the tape again & look at the book - Call on some Ss to read the. Ss’ activities - Listen carefully. - Look at the picture carefully and answer T’s questions + They are in the yard + They are playing/// - Listen to the tape - Listen - Guess the meanings read new words in chrous and individually then copy down. - Play a game.

(119) a. Work with a partner S1 : What is this boy doing ? S2 : He is playing catch + What are these students doing ?. b. Ask and answer questions with a parter. + What do you usually do at recess ? + What do you usually do after school ?. 2. Listen : Match each name to an activity + Mai is playing catch + Kien is playing blind man’s bluff.. + Lan is skipping rape + Ba is playing marbles. 3. Consolidation: 4 mins - Repeat the activities at recess 4. Home work : 1 min. text aloud - Ask Ss to complete the list : Recess activities The most popular activity + meeting friends ……. - Listen to the tape - Read the text aloud. - Complete the list : - Call on some Ss to complete * Recess activities : the list + Meeting friends : + Talking about… + Eating - Revision of the present + Dringking continues tense + Chatting + Playing catch/ marbles/ blindman’s bluff - Ask Ss to look at the picture + Skipping rope again then work in pairs The most popular activity asking anf answering about + Talking activities - Speak about the use, form of - Make model the present continues tense  They are talking S + to be + Ving - Work in pairs - Call on some pairs to ask -Listen and answer in front of the class - Correct the mistakes if have - Practice in front of the class - Ask Ss to write down in the - Write in the notebook notebooks - Explain the aims of the - Listen to the teacher x\exercise to Ss - Answer T’s questions - Make model with a good  I usually play catch or talk student : - Have Ss work in pairs with my friends - Call on some pairs to  I usually play soccer practice in front of the class - Work in pairs - Correct the mistakes if have - Practice asking and answering - Explain the aims of the aloud lesson : Mai, Kien , Lan , Ba are at recess - Listen to the teacher - Review activities at recess - Ask Ss to predict what - Read the activities in the activity each student is books playing at recess. - Predict. - Call on 2 Ss to give their.

(120) - Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them - Do exercise 1 at page 30 in workbook - Prepare part B3,4. predictions. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check the prediction. - Play the tape again for Ss to match. - Have Ss exchange the result with a partner - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers. - Give the prediction. - Listen to the tape and check. - Listen to the tape & match. - Exchange the result - Give the answers - Copy down - Listen to the teacher - Write home work. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ............................................................................................................................... Period: 31. Unit 5 : Work and play Lesson 5 : B - It’s time for recess (B3,4,5). Date of prepared: 09/ 11/2016 Date of teaching : 10/ 11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about activities at recess of American students. They continue practicing asking and answering about activities at recess II. Language content: I. The aims: After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about activities at recess of American students. They continue practicing asking and answering about activities at recess 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary - Pen pal (n) - Junior high school (n) - Energetic (adj) - To swap (v) - To score goal - Portable (adj) - Earphone (n) - To ralax(v) Grammar : Review the present simple tense. 2. Skills :Reading.

(121) 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do Vnamese students often do at recess ? + Do you know what students in other countries often do at recess? ( or in the USA) + What activities do you like ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. Contents, times 1. Warm up : 6 mins Network. T’s activities 1. Warm up : 6 mins - Have Ss play a game : - Demonstrate the group which wins the game.  Lead in new lesson. 2. New activities: 34 mins <3> Read. Then answer the - Ask Ss some questions about questions activities at recess in VN and in orther continues + Pen pal (n) : bạn qua thư + What do Vnamese students + Junior high school (n): often do at recess ? + Energetic (adj) : + Do you know what students in + To score goal : other countries often do at + Portable (adj): recess? ( or in the USA) + Ear phones (n) : + What activities do you like ? + To swap (v) : - Explain some new words to Ss + To relax (v) : *Questions a. Hoa’s penpal Tim goes to an American school b. A ( short ). - Cheking technique : Rub out and remember - Ask Ss to guess what students in the USA often do at recess - Call on some Ss to give their. Ss’activities - Play game in 3 groups. - Clap hands - Write down - Answer T’s questions - They often play catch (marbles) blind man’s bluff or talk , drink.. - Listen carefully - Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and individually then copy down - Play a game - Guess - Give the opinions.

(122) . D (mostly boys ) d. D (work wide >. 3. consolidation : 3 mins Repeat the acivities of American students at recess Names of activities at ecess in Vietnam. 4. Home work : 1 min Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each Do exercise 2 at pgae 31 Prepare part A1 of Unit 6.. opinions - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape in order to know exatly what American students often do at recess - Have Ss read the text and list the activities the American students often do at recess - Call on some students to give the answers - Correct if necessary - Call on some students to read the text in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation : - Ask Ss to read the text again to find out the answers - Have Ss Exchange the result with their partners - Call on some Ss to give the answers - Correct and give the correct answers - Names of activities at recess in Vietnam. - Asks Ss do exercise 2 at pgae 31 - Prepare part A1 of Unit 6.. - Look at the book and listen to the tape - Read the text and list the activities… - Give the answers + Play basketball + Listen to music + Read + Swap baseball cards + eating & talking - Read the text aloud - Read the text and find out the answers - Exchange the results - Give the answers - Copy down - Listen to the tape - Read after the tape - Read aloud - Listen - Write home work. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(123) Period: 32. Unit 6 : After school Lesson 1 : A - What do you to do ? (A1). Date of prepared: 10/11/2016 Date of teaching : 11/11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: After the lesson , Ss will be able to speak about activities after school and give the invitation , the requests II. Language content: I. The aims: After the lesson , Ss will be able to speak about activities after school and give the invitation , the requests 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary : - To invite (v) - To practice (v) - To come along - Together Grammar: - Let’s go to the cafeteria - Why don’t you come along ?. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve..

(124) II- Questions: + What do Vnamese students often do at recess ? + Do you know what students in other countries often do at recess? ( or in the USA) + What activities do you like ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1. Warm up : 5 mins - Have Ss play a game: Networks After – school activities 2. Presentation : 34 mins What do you often do after school ? What are they doing ? + To invite (v) : + To practice (v) : + To come along : + Together : + Let’s /go to the cafeteria and get / a cold drink / invite him + Why don’t you / come along ? / play soccer ? 3. Practice: a. She’s doing her math home work b. They are going to get a cold drink in the caferia c. He’s in the music room d. He’slearning to phay the guitar e. He usually meets his friends f. She likes playing volleyball. T’s activities - Have Ss go to the board and write down - Demonstrate the group which miss the games  Lead the new lesson - Ask Ss some questions such as: What do you often do after school ? - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer the question : What are they doing ? - Have Ss listen to the tape - Explain some new words and structures - Ask Ss to make sentences using the structures:. - Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape again - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialougue. Ss’activities - Play a game - 2 groups take part in the game. - Go to the board & write. - Answer T’s questions - I often play soccer… - Look at the pictures and answer: - They are playing volleyball - They are doing their homework ………….talking - Listen to the tape - Listen carefully - Read new words in chorus and individually then copy down.

(125) 4. Futher practice : 4 mins - Have Ss play a game : Noughts and crosses Lan Do home work These boys Computer games Minh Watch T.V You Listen to music Mai and Hoa Talk The girls Skip rope Nam Play marbles Long&Minh Chat Ba Play the guitar Model S1 : What is Lan doing ? S2 : She is doing her homework 5/ Home work : 1 mins _Write the answers in part A1 in the notebook. Make 5 questions with each structure _Do exercise 1 at page 33 in workbook _Prepare A2. - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class - Correct their pronunciation - Answer : - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again to find out the answers. _Make sentences + Let’s / go to the cinema / Play volley ball + Why don’t you / relax ? / play catch ? - Listen to the tape. - Have Ss work in pairs asking - Work in pairs and answering the questions - Practice reading the dialogue - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers then ask Ss to write down. - Read the dialogue and find the answers - Work in pairs - Practice asking and answering - Copy down. - Play a game Do exercise 1 at page 33 in workbook _Prepare A2. 2 groups make questions and answers with the c Write home work. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(126) Period: 33. Unit 6: After school Lesson 2: A-What do you do? (A2). Date of prepared: 14/ 11/2016 Date of teaching : 15/ 11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: After the lesson,Ss will be able to use adverbs of frequency with the present simple tense for after-school activities II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary: Revisionadverbs of frequency: Always,usually,sometimes,often,never.

(127) Grammar: Review:the present simple tense. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. +How many subjects do you study at school ? +What do you study in each subject ? +Which Subject do you like / dislike ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1/Warm up: 5 mins Read these words in Vietnamese +Swim +Read book +Watch T.V +Play computer games +Play soccer +Go to the movie 2/Presentation: 34 mins _Correct and give the corect answers: 1/Reading/studying in the library 2/Swimming in the pool 3/Playing computer games 4/Going to a movie 5/Playing soccer 6/Watching T.V. T’s activities _Have Ss review the old lesson by playing a game called slap the board _ _give the result and remark. _Ask SS to look at the pictures in the books carefully _Have Ss call the names of the pictures. Ss’activities _Play a game slap the board _Slap in E words _2 groups take part in the game. _Look at the pictures carefully _Call the names of the pictures _Give the answers. _Call on someSs to give the answers _Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about. _Work in pairs.

(128) 3/Practice b/Ask Ss the questions: What do you usually do after school?. 4/Futher practice: 4 mins _Have Ss do exercise 5 at page 71 of Language focus _Give the information in the table and ask Ss to look at the table then matching : Activities Frequency Go cafeteria never Ride bicycle sometimes Practice guitar often Do home work usually Play computer games always _Call on some Ss to give the result _Correct the mistakes _Ask Ss to write about Ba, using the information Model : _Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time ………….. _Call on 2 students to go to the board and wirte down _Remark and give marks. the pictures _Make model What are these students doing? They are reading in the library _Call on some pairs to practice in front of the cllass. _Have Ss play a game: Noughts and crosses Always Go swimming Often Play computer games Never Go to the library Usually Play soccer Sometimes play computer games Often Go to a movie Usually Watch T.V Often Play tennis Sometimes Do homework _Remark _Ask Ss to use adverbs in the box to write a sentences for each day of the week. _Have Ss Work in pairs asking and answering _Call on some pairs to. _Practice in front of the class _Listen to the teacher than answer I usually play soccer _Play a game in 2 groups.. _Make questiona and answers with the cues. _Write sentences + On Monday, I usually go to the library + On Tuesday , I often play socer with my friend …. _Work in pairs _Practice in front of. _Answer T’s questions  I always go to the library after school _Work in pairs _Practice in front of the class. _Do exercise 5.

(129) 5/ Home work : 1 min _Write a sentence for each day of the week , using the advends of frequency _Do exercise 2+3 at page 34 in work book _Prepare part 3,4,5. practice in front of the class _Remark and correct the mistakes Now ask and answer question,using “How often……?” _Make example with a student +How often do you go to the library? _Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering,using the pictures in the book _Call on some pairs to pratce in front of the class _Correct the mistake if have. _Read the information in the table and matc _Give the result _Write sentences about Ba _Go to the board and writes _Write homework. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period: 34. Unit 6 : After school Lesson 3 : A_What do you do ? (3, 4, 5). Date of prepared: 16/ 11/2016 Date of teaching : 17/ 11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: After the lesson , Ss will be able to read a text for details about pastime activities II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary: Sport, a comic, a president, an anmversary celebration, collector, collection + Grammar : Review _The pusent simple tense _The progresstive tense. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English..

(130) 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What dows Nga bike doing after school ? + What do Ba and his friend often do on Wednesday afternoon ? + What do Ba and his friend often do after school hours ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1/ Warm up: 5 mins Ex : I usually play soccer after school. T’s activities. _Ask Ss to write pentences about the activity which they play after school _Ask one student to go to the board and their friends guess _Remark. 2/ New activities: 36 mins <3> Read then answer: Call on some students to give their prediction + Explain some new word : + Sporty (adj): Thể thao + Comic (n): Hài hước + a predident + an anmiversary : Lễ kỉ niệmcelebration + To collect (v) Sưu tầm + reheares (v): Diễn kịch + a collection + collection (n) True or False prediction : 1. Nga, Ba and Nam are students in class 7 A 2. They like sprots very much. _Have Ss look at the pictures and guess what the students are doing _ _Have Ss read new words in chours and individually _checking technique What and where _Have Ss do an exercise True or False prediction : 7. Nga, Ba and Nam are students in class 7 A 8. They like sprots very much 9. Nga’s favorite pastime is jogging 10.Ba like collecting stamps. S’s activities. _Write sentences _Guess what their friends do after school Ex : Do you play volleyball after school ?. _ Look at the picture and guess _Give the prediction _Listen and write down. Guess meaning, read in chours and individually then copy down. _Play a game.

(131) 3. Nga’s favorite pastime is jogging 4. Ba like collecting stamps 5. Nam plays soccer ecery afternoon 6. Nam usually watches T.V _Correct then give the corect answer: 1–T 3–F 5– F 2–F 4–T 6– T. 11.Nam plays soccer ecery afternoon 12.Nam usually watches T.V _Have Ss work in groups to give their predictions _Call on some groups to give their predictions _Ask Ss to look at the book and read in silent _Ask Ss correct the exercise _Correct then give the corect answer 1–T 3–F 5–F 2–F 4–T 6–T _Call on some Ss to read the passage Aloud _Correct their pronunciation _Ask Ss to look at the questions and read the passage a/ Her groups is rehearsaing again to find out the answers a play for the school _Have Ss work in pairs anniversary celebration _Call on some pairs to ask and b/ He gets American stamps answer in front of the class from Liz , his American _Correct the mistakes and give friend the correct answers c/ The stamp collector’s club meets on Wednesday _Ask Ss some more questions: afternoon + What dows Nga bike doing d/ Nam never plays games after school ? + What do Ba and his friend often do on Wednesday afternoon ? + What do Ba and his friend often do after school hours ? <4> Listen Match each name to an activity: A – Mai – go to the school cafeteria B – Nam – rehearse a play C – Ba – go to the circers D – Lan – watch movie. _Do exercise in groups. _Work in groups _Give the predictions _Read in silent _Correct the exercise. _Read the passage loudly _Find out the answers _Work in pairs _Practice asking and answering _Copy down. _Answer T’s questions. _Introduce the aims of the exercise _Ask Ss to read the names and activities _Listen carefully _Ask Ss to give their _Read predictions _Give the prediction.

(132) E – Kien – tidy the class room. _Have Ss listen to the tape (2 times ) _Call on some Ss to give the results _Play the tape again to check the answers _Correct and give the correct answer:. _Listen to the tape _Gice the results _Check the answers _Write down. _Have Ss listen to the tape _Ask them to look at the books and read after the tape _Call on some Ss to read in front of the class _Correct their pronunciation. _Listen to the tape _Read after the tape. <5> Play with words :. 3/ Consolidation : 2 mins _Repeat the activities after school hours _Ask Ss to write a paraguaph about after school activities, using matching _Remark 4/ Home work: 1 min _Learn by heart new words by writing 3 times for each _Do exercise 4 at page 35 in work book. _Read alouds _Listen _Write a paragraph Speak aloud. _Learn by heart new words by writing 3 times for each _Do exercise 4 at page 35 in work book _Write home work. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(133) Period: 35. Unit 6 : After school Lesson 4 : B_Let’s go ( B1). Date of prepared: 17/ 11/2016 Date of teaching : 18/ 11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to make/give suggestions and accept or refuse the suggestions… II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary : Assigament (n) Fun (adj) Structure : _Let’s + V _What about + Ving ? _Why don’t / we / you.

(134) _Responses : _Yes, let’s _Good idea / ok _Sorry, I can’t. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do you usually do after the school ? + Do you like playing soccer ? + Do you usuallt / go to the movie ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. Contents,times 1/ Warm up : 5 mins + What do you usually do after the school ? + Do you like playing soccer ? + Do you usually / go to the movie ? / play games ? + How often do you go to the movie ? 2/ New activities : 36 mins <1> Listen then practice in groups of flour +What they should do to relax? +How they should relax? + Assignment (n) = home work + Fun (adj) + Suggestions : + Let’s go to my house go to Lan’s house. T’s activities. Ss’activities. _Ask Ss some questions about _Answer T’s questions themselves + What do you usually do after the school ? + Do you like playing soccer ? + Do you usually / go to the movie ? / play games ? + How often do you go to the movie ? _Listen carefully _Introduce the situation of the dialogue : Ba , Nam , Lan and Hoa are discussing about / _Guess _Have Ss look at the picture and guess what activities they are talking _Call on some Ss to give their predictions. _Give the predictions _Listen to the tape _Look at the books _Give the answer.

(135) + Why don’t you relax ? + What about going to the movie ?. _Listen and write down. _Call on one student to give the answer _Introduce some new words and structures: a/ Nam wants to go to the _Have Ss practice the dialogue movies in front of the class b/ Lan does n’t want to go to _Call on some groups to the movies because there practice in front of the class aren’t any good movies at the _Correct the pronunciation moment _Now answer : c/ Lan wants ti kisten to music _Ask Ss to read the dialogue at her house again to find out the answers d/ Hoa does n’t want to go to for questions Lan’s house because she has _ Have Ss work in pairs too many assignments _ Call on some pairs to ask e/ It’s Saturday and answer in front of the 1/ Let’s / listen / music class 2/ What / Watch / movie _Correct then give the correct 3/ Why / join us answers 4/ What / go / cafeteria _Practice 5/ Why / study / library _Have Ss practice , using Make model : given words : S1 : Let’s listen to some music Make model : S2 : Yes , let’s good idea S1 : Let’s listen to some music S2 : Yes , let’s good idea _Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class _Correct the mistakes if necessary 3/ Consolidation : 3 mins S1 : What should we do this afternoon ? S2 : Let’s go to the movies S1 : There is n’t any good movie on S2 : What about going to Mai’s house ? We can play a game togerther S1 : But It’s too far. I don’t. Read in chours and individually. Write down. Make sentences with structures _Practice the dialogue _Practice in front of the class. _Read the dialogue then find out the answers _Work in pairs _Practice asking and answering aloud _Copy down. _Give a mapped dialogue then _Practice in pairs ask Ss to make a dialogue using given words & phrases You Your friend What..do..afternoon ? Movies. _Practice in front of the class. Not good movie Mai’s house _Listen & make a dialogue Tow far…not have a bike.

(136) have a bike S2 : Why don’t we take a bus ? S1 : OK 4/ Home work: 1 min _Make & sentences for each structures _Do exercise 1 at page 35 in work book _Prepare B2,4. …take a bus Ok _Have Ss work in pairs _Call on some pairs to make a dialogue in front of the class _Correct the mistakes then give the correct dialogue. _Work in pairs _Practice in front of the class _Write down. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .............................................................................................................................. Period: 36. Unit 6 : After school Lesson 5 : B_Let’s go ! (2, 4). Date of prepared: 21/ 11/2016 Date of teaching : 22/ 11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: After the lesson , Ss will be able to know a magazine survery about the most popular activities of American teenagees and ger further practice in leisure vocabulary II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: 1/ Vocabulary _Tennager _Musical instrument _Model _Organization _Scout _Guide _Coin 2/ Structure : Revision : Present simple tense. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :.

(137) - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. +How many subjects do you study at school ? +What do you study in each subject ? +Which Subject do you like / dislike ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents , times 1/ Warm up: 6 mins _Have Ss play a game: Pelmanison Have 6 cards <1> What about <2> Why don’t <3> Let’s <4> Collectstamps <5> Going to the circus ? <6> You study in the library 2/ New activities: 34 mins + Teenager (n) : thiếu niên + Musical mstrument (n) : Nhạc cụ + Model (n) : mẫu + Scout (n) : Hướng đạo sinh + Guide (n) : + Coin (n) : Tiền xu + Organization (n) : Tổ chức. 1/ Which of the activities in the best of American teenagers do you think are aloo popolar among Vnamese teenagers ? 2/ Are there many kinds of. T’s activities. S’s activities. _Have Ss play a game: _Play a game Pelmanison Pelmanism Have 6 cards <1> What about <2> Why don’t 2 groups take part in the game <3> Let’s <4> Collectstamps <5> Going to the circus ? <6> You study in the library _Remark _List the activities _Ask Ss to list the activities that teenagess like to do in their free time _Explain some new words to Ss _Checking technique Rub out and remember _Ask Ss to predict what American (students) teenagers like to di in their free time _Call on some students to give then predictions _Ask Ss to look at the. _Listen carefully _Guess meanings , read new words in chours and individually Copy down. _Play a game Rubout & remember _Predict _Give the prediction.

(138) entertainment for teenagers in VN ? What are they ? 3/ What organizations are there for teenagers in VN ?. pictures in the book and call the names of these activities. _Ask Ss to look at the book and read the text in silent _Have Ss give the names of activities _Ask them to compare with their predictions _Remark and call some students to read the text aloud _Give some comprehension questions: _Call on some Ss to give the answers _Correct the mistakes _Practice _Ask Ss to discuss in groups 3/ Consolidation: 2 mins of four _Compare with the activities of _Have Ss ask their friends American teenagers with out they like doing in _Repeat the top ten most popular their free time, then make a activities of American teenagers list of their groups favorite leisure activity in front of the 4. Homework: 1 min class Learn by heart 10 most popular _Call on some groups to read activities about their group’s favorite _Do exercise 2 at page 35 in leisure activities aloud work book _Remark then give the most _Prepare part 3,5 popular activity of the students in class. _Call the names of activities + Eating and drinking + Playing the guita + Going shopping + Watching T.V + Collecting things + Helping old people _Read in silent _Give manes _Compare _Read aloud _Answer + Watching T.V + Listening to music + Going to the movie + Helping old people. _Give the answers _Work in groups _Make a list of the group’s favorite leasure activities _Some groups read aloud _Listen _Write home work. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(139) Period: 37. Unit 6 : After school Lesson 6 : B_Let’s go (3,5) Date of prepared: 23/ 11/2016 Date of teaching : 24/ 11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson, Ss will continue praticing the invitation. They will be bale to know how American teenagers help the ammunity II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: 1/ Vocabulary Wedding (n) Elderly people Community service Volumteer (n) Neighborhood clean_up _Canpaigns 2/ Structure : _Would you like to…? _Why don’t you…? _What about….?  Yes, I’d love to That would be great fun.

(140) I ‘d love to but I’m sorry I can’t 3/ Skill. Reading comprehension. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you usually use the invitations ? + In which occasions do you use these invitations ? + How do you accept or reguse the invitations ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1/ Warm up : & check : 7 mins Ask Ss some questions about what they like doing in their free time. 2/ New activities : 35 mins <3> Listen then practice with a partner + Do you usually use the invitations ? + In which occasions do you use these invitations ? + How do you accept or reguse the invitations ? + Would you like to…?  Accept the invitation Yes, I’d love to That would be great fun  Refuse the invitation. T’s activities. Ss’ activities. Ask Ss some questions about what they like doing in their free time _Call on some one student to go to the board and write down the activities of American teenagers bike doing in their free time _Remark and give mark. _answer teacher’s questions _Go to the board and write down. _Write down _Answer T’s questions. Make similar dialogue _Ask Ss some questions:. ( Ss can answer the questions in VN ).  Lead in to new lesson _Introduce the invitation _Listen to the teacher _Make example : Would you like to have a drink ? Yes, I’d love to _Have Ss make some ssentences as model _Ask Ss to look at the dialogue and listen to the tape (two. _Write down.

(141) I’d love to but I’m sorry I can’t. <4> Read then discuss + Community servise (n) : + Eloderly people (n) : Người già + Stripe : Kẻ sọc + To concern (v) : Liên quan + Environment (n) : Môi trường + Neighborhood : hàng xóm. Chiến dịch làm sạch khu dân cư. 3/ Consolidation : 3 mins _Repeat the structures of invitation and activities teenagers can help the commounty 4/ Home work : 1 min _Learn by heart new words & remember by making sentences. times ) _Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue _Call on some pairs to role play the dialogue in front of the class _Correct their pronunciation _Have Ss based on the dialogue to make similar dialogue _Have Ss work in pairs _Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class _Correct the mistakes for Ss _Ask Ss to tell the things teenagers con do to help the community _Explain some new words and phrases _Checking technique : Rub out and remember _Ask Ss to read the passage to find out the activities which teenagers help the community _Call on some Ss to give the answer _Correct and give the correct answers : + Help olderly people + Work as hospital volumteer + Work on neigh borhoad clean_up campaigns _Call on some Ss to read the passage _Class discuss : _Ask Ss to read the two questions then discuss in groups _Call on some groups to give the answers in front of the class _Correct the mistakes. _Make sentences + Would you like to go to the movie with me ?  I’d love to but I’m sorry I can’t _Listen to the tape _Work in pairs Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class _Make similar dialogue _Work in pairs _Practice in front of the class _Tell the things teeagers can do : _Listen carefully _Read in chours and invidually, guess meaning then write down. _Read the passage and find the activities which teenagers help the comminuvity _Give the answers _Read the passage aloud _Discuss in groups _Listen carefully. VI. Experiences:.

(142) ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period: 38. Language focus 2 (1 - 3). Date of prepared: 24/ 11/2016 Date of teaching : 25/ 11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson ,Ss will review the know ledge which have been learnt from unit 4 to unit 6 such as : The present continuons tense , time and subjects…. II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary : - Essay (n) - Past and present event - Author (n) - Graph (n) - Equation (n) - Globe (n) - Caculator (n) + The present continuous tense. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. +How many subjects do you study at school ? +What do you study in each subject ? +Which Subject do you like / dislike ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments.

(143) IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1/ Warm up : 5ms Have Ss play a game Mini game + Brainstorm the activities at recess. 2/ Consolidation and practice: 38 ms 1/ Present proguessive tense: Review the formation and use of the present continuose tense + S + am/is/are + Ving - S + am /is/are + not + Ving ? ? Am/is/are + S + Ving Use : It is used to express an action which is happening at the time at present 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7.. is doing is writing is reading is cooking are playing is kicking is sunning. 2/ This & that, these & those. T’s action _Have Ss play a game Mini game + Brainstorm the activities at recess + Call on some of the students to present in front of the class + Ask Ss to make sentences a loud activities in the present continuous tense _Remark. Ss’action Play a game + In pairs , Ss mine the acativities to each other. + Present to each other. _Ask Ss to give the formation and use of the present continuose tense _Have Ss make sentences _Ask Ss to do exercise 1 _Have Ss exchange the result with their partners _Call on some Ss to give their answers _Correct & give the correct answers:. + Present in front of the class _Do exercise 1. Make some sentences. _Ask Ss to give the use of this, that, these, those _Ask them to look at the pictures carefully and complete the dialogue _Call on some Ss to do exercise in front of the class _Do exercise 2 _Correct & give the correct answers: _Give the formation and use b/ Put this bag away.

(144) b/ Put this bag away That isn’t my bag ,mum This is my bag c/ Put those dirty souks (on the bed) in the washing basket. These socks ? No, those socks on the bed d/ Throw away those comics But, I like these comes,mom. <3> Time: Look at the clocks in the book then call the time. That isn’t my bag ,mum This is my bag c/ Put those dirty souks (on the bed) in the washing basket. These socks ? No, those socks on the bed d/ Throw away those comics But, I like these comes,mom _Ask Ss to look at the clocks in the book then call the time _Have Ss complete the dialogues in the books _Ask them to work in pairs _Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class _Correct the mistakes (Thinking/ answer / idea ) _Corerct the mistakes. 3/ Furthes practice : _Do exercise : I/ Complete the sentences with the suitable words or phrases 1/ ___don’t you come to my house ? Ok. Let’s go (Why/let’s/what ) 2/ What about __Halong Bay ? Prepare for the next lesson (tovisit / visit / visitting ) 3/ Would you like __badminton ? (play / to play / playing ) 4/ Children should __to bed early (go/ to go / going ) 5/ That’s a good__? Let’s go to the beach 4/ Consolidation: 1m 5/ Homework: 2 ms _ Prepare for the next lesson. _Make sentences. We are learning E now He is reading a book. _Do exercise 3 _Exchange the results. _Give the answers. _Copy down. Write homework.

(145) VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period: 39. Language focus 2 (4 - 6). Date of prepared: 28/11/2016 Date of teaching : 29/11/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson ,Ss will review the know ledge which have been learnt from unit 4 to unit 6 such as : The present continuons tense , time and subjects…. II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary : - Essay (n) - Past and present event - Author (n) - Graph (n) - Equation (n) - Globe (n) - Caculator (n) Review : _ The present continuons tense _ Time and subject vocabulary _This, that , these , those _Adverbs of frequency _Making suggestions. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. +How many subjects do you study at school ? +What do you study in each subject ? +Which Subject do you like / dislike ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do..

(146) - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1/ Warm up : 5’ 2/ Consolidation and practice: 4> Vocabulary : Subject a/ Physical education b/ Chemistry c/ Math d/ Geography e/ English f/ History 5> Adverbs of frequency. + Ba seldom rides a bike to school + Ba always practices the guitar after school + Ba usually does his home work in the evening + Ba sometimes plays computer games. T’s action. _Ask Ss to look at 6 pictures in the books and call the correct aubject names _Have some Ss to give the subject names in front of the class _Correct the mistakes & give the correct answers _Have Ss look at the table and ask them to write sentences about Ba, using adverbs of frequency _Make example : Ba never goes to the cafeteria at lunch time _Askk Ss to erite four sentences about Ba _Have Ss exchange the results with their friends _Call on som Ss to gieve the answers aloud _Correct and give the correct answers _Have Ss look at the table _Ask them to read the short dialogues _Have Ss make similar dialogues using given words or phrases _Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class _Correct the mistakes if necessary. Ss’action. _Look at the pictures and call the correct names _Give the subject names _Copy down. _Look at the table and write sentences about Ba _Listen _Write 4 sentences about Ba _Exchange the results _Give the answers _Copy down. _Look at the table _Read dialogues _Make dialogues in pairs _Practice in front of the.

(147) 6> Making suggestions :. 1. He goes to the library three times a week < make questions> 2. They will visit their grand parents to night (change into negative form) 3. What do you usually do after school ? (answer the questions ? 4. We play soccer (make a suggestion 4/ Consolidation 5/ Homework _Review from unit 4 to unit 6 _Do test yourself 2. 3/ Furthes practice : _Have Ss do exercise : Do as directed in the brackets 5. He goes to the library three times a week < make questions> 6. They will visit their grand parents to night (change into negative form) 7. What do you usually do after school ? (answer the questions ? 8. We play soccer (make a suggestion ) _Corerct the mistakes. class S1 : Let’s play volleyball S2 : Ok S1 : Would you like to watch movies ? S2 : I’ d love to _Do exercise Go to the board and do. Go to the board and write down. Write homework. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(148) Period: 41. Unit 7 : The world of work Lesson 1 : A student’s work (A1). Date of prepared: 01/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 02/ 12/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: After the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about a student’s work and practice comparativers with fewer and more II. Language content: + Knowledge: Vocabulary - Hour (n) - To last (v) - Hard - Late later - Early  Earlier - Few  Fewer - Many  more + Grammar Review the present tense Structure : that takes about 2 hours each day. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What time do your classes start ? + What time do they finish ? + How many hours a day do you do your home work. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan ..

(149) V. Procedure: Contents, times 1/ Warm up : 6 ms + What time do your classes start ? + What time do they finish ? + How many hours a day do you do your home work 2/ New activities : 36ms a/ Presentation: + An hour (n) + To last (v) + Hard + Late  Later + Early  earlier + Few  fewer + Many  more a/ What time do Hoa’s classes start and finish b/ Do your classes start earlier or later ? c/ How many hours a day does Hoa do her homework ? d/ Do you work fewer or more hours than Hoa ?. * Questions : a/ Her classes start at 7 o’clock b/ They finish at a quarter past elcrion c/ She does her home work 2 hours a day d/ She will visit her parents on their farm during her vacation b/ Practice :. T’s action. Ss’ action. _Greetings _Ask some questions about _Answer T’s questions themselves  They start at  Remark and lead in new lesson : They finish at _Introduce the lesson “ You wil hear a cowersation between Hoa and her uncle about school work “ _Explain some new words : _Have Ss play a game Rub put and remember _Have Ss predict the answers ,using questions a,b,c,d _Ask Ss to work in groups _Call on some representatwes to give their predictions _Presentation dialogue _Have Ss look at the books and listen to the tape _Ask them to read the dialogue a gain and check their preditions _Remark _Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue _Call on some pairs to role phay the dialogue in front of the class _Correct the pronunciation _Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions _Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering the questions in front of the class _Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers _Explain the structure That takes about 2 hours each day. _Listen carefully _Listen and write down _Guess meanings, read in chours and individually  copy down _Play game _Predict the answers. +Work in groups _Give the predictions _Look at the book & listen to the tape _Read the dialogue and check the prediction _Work in pairs _Practice the dialogue in front of the class.

(150) Structure: That takes about 2 hours ach day = It takes Hoa about 2 hours o do her home work each day It takes Sb to make xamples + Hoa’s classes : 7:00 Our classes : 6:45 + The film : 9:30 + The play : 10 :00 + Hoa (work ) : 2 hours Miss Mai : 4 hours Make example S1 : Hoa’s classes start later han ourclasses S2 : Our classes start earlier han Hoa’s classes. / Production: Make sentences comparing heir work with Hoa’s work using 3/ Consoldation: 3 ms Exchange the results with heir partners 4/ Home work : 1 m _Learn by heart new words 48 in work book. = It takes Hoa about 2 hours to do her home work each day  It takes Sb to make examples _Ask Ss to make examples _Give word cue to drikl + Hoa’s classes : 7:00 Our classes : 6:45 + The film : 9:30 + The play : 10 :00 + Hoa (work ) : 2 hours Miss Mai : 4 hours. _Work in pairs _Practice in front of the class _Copy down _Listen carefully and write down _Make examples _Write down. _Have Ss work in pairs _Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class _Correct the mistakes _Ask Ss to make sentences comparing their work with Hoa’s work using earber/later/fewer/more _Have Ss exchange the results with their partners _Call on some students to read then sentences aloud _Remark _Learn by heart new words 48 in work book. _Listen _Work in pairs _Practice in front of the class _Make sentences _Exchange the results _Read aloud Listen to the teacher and write down homework.. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(151) Period: 42. Unit 7 : The world of work Lesson 2 : student’s work (A 2,3). Date of prepared: 05/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 06/ 12/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be bale to compare American students’vacations and Vietnamese students’ vacations. Praticing reading and listening skills II. Language content: + Vocabulary: _To celebrate (v): Tổ chức _Easter (n): Lễ phục sinh _Thanks giving: Lễ tạ ơn _New year ‘s Eve: Năm mới _Independence Day: Lễ độc lập _Christmas: Lễ giáng sinh + Grammar : Review; _The present simple tense _Comparetive with later/earlier/fewer/more. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. +How many subjects do you study at school ? +What do you study in each subject ? +Which Subject do you like / dislike ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1/ Warm up & check: 8. T’s action. Ss’action.

(152) mins Play a game : Pelmanism Early/ late/ longer/ few/ long / earlier / later / fewer _Device the class into 2 groups 2/ New activities: 30 mins <2> Read them answer the questions + To celebrate (v) : tổ chức, kỉ niệm + Easter : Lễ phục sinh + Thanks giving : lễ tạ ơn + New year’s Eve : Năm mới + Independence Day : Ngày độc lập + Christmas: Lễ giáng sinh Have Ss play again What and Where. 1/ Vietnamese students have fewer vacation than American students 2/ American students have the longest vacation in winter 3/ They don’t have a Tet holiday 4/ their most important vacation is New year’s day 5/ They usually spend their time with their families on Thanks giving and Chirstmas Day 1–T 2–F3-T 4–F 5–T. _Have Ss play a game : Pelmanism _Play a game Early/ late/ longer/ few/ long / earlier / later / fewer _Device the class into 2 groups _Ask them to play game _Remark _Play game. _Introduce the situation of the lesson _Present some new words: _Correct their pronunciation _Checking technique. _Ask Ss to do exercise T or F before reading the letter _Call on some groups to give their predictions _Ask Ss to look at the book and read the letter _Ask them to check their predictions _Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class _Correct and give the correct answers. _Listen carefully _Listen _Guess meanings, read new worlds in chorus and individually  copy down. _Play game _Do exercise. _Work in groups predicting the statements T or F. _Give the precdictions _Read the letter _Check the predictions _Give the answers. _Call on 2  3 students to read the letter aloud _Questions : _Have Ss work in pairs _Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class _Correct the mistakes and give _Read the letter aloud the correct answers _Have Ss fill in the grids.

(153) Vacations Vn students American students a/ Summer vacation in the longest in America b/ During his vacation, Tim spends time with his family c/ Vnamese students have fewer vacations than american students <3> Listen. Write the name: Look at the pictures carefully. a/ Thanhs giving b/ Independence Day c/ New year’s Eve d/ Chistmas. Longest vacation Tet holiday Thanks giving Chistmas Independence Day Easter New year’s / Eve Day In the summer. _Work in pairs _Practice in front of the class _Copy down. _Fill in the grids _Write down in the notebooks. Lunar December 30th In the summer July 4th January 1st _Ask Ss to look at the pictures carefully _Ask Ss to predict the name of each picture _Play the tape for Ss ( 2times) _Call on some Ss to give their answers in front of the class _Correct and give the correct answers. _Look at the pictures carefully Precdict the names of each pictures _Listen to the tape _Match the name with the pictures _Listen & check the answers _Give the answers _Copy down. 3/ Consolidation: 2 mins _Ask Ss to repeat (about) the names of the public holidays in American and Vnamese. _Ask Ss to repeat (about) the names of the public holidays in American and Vnamese _Repeat the names of the public holidays. 4/ Home work: 1 min _Learn by heart new words by writing 2 times for each _Do exercise 4 at page 44 in workbook _Prepare part 4. Learn by heart new words by writing 2 times for each _Do exercise 4 at page 44 in workbook _Prepare part 4. _Write home work.

(154) VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(155) Period: 43. Unit 7 : The world of work Lesson 3 : A student’s work (A4). Date of prepared: 07/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 08/ 12/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: After the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a typical student’s life. They will continue practicing reading comprehension II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary : _To review _Typical _Keer _Lazy _Period _To take a look Grammar Review : _The present simple tense _Comparaties with few/many. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do you do every day ? + How many hours a day do you study ? + Do you have to do a lot of home work ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1/ Warm up : Have Ss play a game. T’s action _Have Ss play a game. S’s action.

(156) Net work American public holidays. Net work. _Play a game. American public holidays _Devide the class into 2 groups _Call on 2 dtudents represented for their groups to go to the board and write down. _2 students go to the board and write. Pre_reading:. What do you do every y? How many hours a day do ou study ? Do you have to do a lot of ome work ?. period To review Typical Keen Lazy To take a look Definitely While_reading. Hoa goes to school __day week She has__periods aday She works __hours a week She has about__ hours of ome work every week Before test , she works _hours a week ead the text in silent and eck their prediction 6 days 5 period 20 hours 12 hours 45 hours ave Ss play a game : Lucky umbers. _Ask Ss some questions alout them selves. _Answer T’s questions. + (Have) Introduce the situation of the lesson _Explain some new words _Listen to the teacher _Listen carefully _Have Ss play a game _Remark _Ask Ss to prediet the information about Hoa _Have Ss work in groups _Call on some representativies to give the predictions _Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape. Guess meanings, read new words in chours and individually , then copy down _Play game _Predice the information about Hoa. _Work in groups _Give the predictions _Ask them to read the text in silent and check their prediction _Call on some Ss to give the _Listen to the tape answers _Correct and give the correct _Read & check the prediction answer _Give the answers _Call on 3 4 students to read the text aloud.

(157) 1/ Why do some people think that students have an easy life ? 2/ Lucky number 3/ Does Hoa have to work at home ? 4/ Does Hoa work fewer hours than most workers ? 5/ How many hours a week do you work ? 6/ Lucky number 7/ How many hours a week does she work before tests ? 8/ How many work fewer or more than Hoa? 4/ Post_reading _Ask Ss some questions : + What do you think of a students life ? + Do you think students are lazy ? 5/ Home work _Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each _Write the answer in the notebooks _Do exercise 2,3 at page 43,44 in work book _Prepare part B1. _Correct their pronunciation _Questions _Ask Ss to read the text again & find ort the answers. _Read the text aloud _Read the text then find put the answers. _Remark 4/ Post_reading _Ask Ss some questions : + What do you think of a students life ? + Do you think students are lazy ? _Remark. _Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each _Write the answer in the notebooks _Do exercise 2,3 at page 43,44 in work book _Prepare part B1. _Play game in groups. _Answer the questions based on the text. _Answer T’s questions _Write home work. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period: 44. Unit 7 : The world of work Lesson 4 : The worker (B1). Date of prepared: 07/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 08/ 12/2016(Chạy chương trình buổi chiều).

(158) Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Tim’s Parents ‘job and the time they work in aweek . They continue practicing reading comprehension . Language content: 1.Knowledge: Vocabulary : - To take care of ( v) -Mechanic ( n ) - Machine ( n ) - To work part- time - Shift ( n) - To play golf - Homeless ( adj ) Grammar : Review : the present simple tense. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. Contents, times Warm up : 5 mins + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ?. T’s Action. Ss’ Action -Answer T’ questions. - Ask students somes questions about Hoa.

(159) + What do you think about students’ life ? ……………. 2. New activities : 37 mins  Pre – reading : + To take care of ( v ) = to look after + To work part – time +Mechanic ( n ) + Machine ( n ) + Shift ( n ) + Homeless ( adj )  Checking technique : Play a game : What and where  Ordering the main ideas : a. Mr Jones’s work . b. Tim’s introduction of his family. c. Mr Jones’s vacation time . d. Mrs. Jones’s work . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to give their predictions in front of the class. - Correct and give the correct answers 1. B 2. D 3. A 4. C  While – reading : read the letter then check. and themselves . - Remark. -Introduce the situation of the lesson -Explain some new words or phrases :.  Checking technique : Play a game : What and where - Ask Ss to predict the order of the main ideas. - Listen to the teacher - Listen and write Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and individually, then copy down. Play a game : what and where . - Predict the order of the main ideas .. -Work in pairs - Give the predictions . - Look at the book and listen to the tape - Read the letter and check the prediction - Give the answers - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape . - Ask Ss to read the letter then check their predictions.. -Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class a. Mrs. Jones works at - Correct and give the home . But three mornings correct answers a week she works part – 1. B 2. D 3.. - Read the letter in front of the class. - Work in pairs - Practice in front of the class . - Copy down..

(160) b. c. d. e.. f.. g. h. i. j.. time at a local supermarket. She cooks for homeless people once a week . Mr. Jones is a mechanic . He repairs machines in a factory . He works about 40 hours a week . The Jones family always goes to Florida on vacation . They have a great time there . Mrs. Jones works at home . But three mornings a week she works part – time at a local supermarket. She cooks for homeless people once a week . Mr. Jones is a mechanic . He repairs machines in a factory . He works about 40 hours a week . The Jones family always goes to Florida on vacation . They have a great time there .. Post – reading : Write a letter with the information about their own family.. - Read the letter in front of the class. Consolidation : 2 mins -Ask Ss to repeat the work of the Jones family . Homework : 1 min - Learn by heart new words. A 4. C -Call some Ss to read the letter in front of the class - Correct the pronunciation . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions in the book . -Write a letter about their own family . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers : - Exchange the letters with the partners. - Read the letter in front of the class . Ask Ss to base on Tim’s letter to write a letter with the information about their own family. -Ask Ss to exchange their letters with their partners - Call on some Ss to read the letter in front of the class. - Correct the mistakes if necessary . -Ask Ss to repeat the work of the Jones family . - Remark. - Repeat the Jones family ‘ work ..

(161) by writing 2 lines with each . - Do exercise 1, 2 at page 44 , 45 in workbook. - Prepare part 2,3. - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines with each . - Do exercise 1, 2 at page 44 , 45 in workbook. - Prepare part 2,3. - Write homework .. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period: 45. Unit 7 :The world of work Lesson 5 :The worker (B2,3 ). Date of prepared: 07/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 08/ 12/2016(Chạy chương trình buổi chiều) Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: After the lesson , the students continue practicing reading skill and comparative with fewer , less and more . II. Language content: + Vocabulary : - To feed ( v ) Cho ăn - Main crop ( n ) - To grow ( v ) - Buffalo shed ( n ).

(162) -To rest ( v ) - Chicken coop ( n ) + Grammar : Review : comparative with fewer / less / more. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + How many people are there in Tim’s family? + What does Tim’s father do? + How many hours a week does Mr. Jones work? + How many public holidays does he have ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. Contents, times T’ Action 1 .Warm up : 6 mins Check old lesson: + How many people are _ Ask students some there in Tim’s family? questions about The Jones + What does Tim’s father do? _ Remark and give + How many hours a week does Mr. Jones work? marks . + How many public holidays does he have ? ………………. 2. New activities : 36 mins a. Read . -Can you guess what the _ Ask Ss to look at the man does ? picture answer the -What are the daily duties question : of a farmer ? _ Introduce the situation of the lesson . _ Explain some new + To feed ( v ) : words to Ss. + To rest ( v ) : + Main crop ( n) :. Ss’ Action _ Answer T’s questions .. _ Answer the questions : He is a farmer . _ Listen to the teacher . _Listen and write . Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down. Play game.

(163) + Buffalo shed ( n ) : + Chicken coop ( n ) : + Real ( adj ) :  Presentation text : + Does Mr. Tuan work more hours than Tim’s father ? + What time does he start work ? + What time does his work finish ? + How many vacations does Mr. Tuan have ?. b. Compare : - Read the text Read the text about Mr. - Tuan again and the letter of Tim then. Checking technique : Rub out and remember . _ give some questions about Mr. Tuan and ask Ss to guess the answers . _ Call some Ss to give their prediction . _ Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan then check their predictions . _ Call on some Ss to give the answers. _Call some Ss to read the text aloud . _ Correct the pronunciation . _Ask Ss to read the text about Mr. Tuan again and the letter of Tim then make note about them . _Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner . _Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class . _Correct the mistakes and give the correct answer. 3.Consolidation : 2 mins - Use the information about Mr. Tuan and Mr. Jones to. _ Guess the answers .. _Ask Ss to use the information about Mr. Tuan and Mr. Jones to write sentences , using comparative .. _ Give the prediction . _ Read the text and check the predictions . _ Give the answers a. Yes, he does. b. He starts work at 6: 00 c. His work finishes at 6 pm d. He has no real vacations . _Read the text aloud . _Read the text about Mr. Tuan and the letter then make note. _ Exchange the result with the partner . _ Give the result in front of the class.. _ Write down . _ Listen . _Go to the board and write . Mr. Jones has more vacations than Mr. Tuan. Or: Mr. Tuan has fewer vacations than Mr. Jones ..

(164) write sentences , using comparative . Example : Mr. Tuan works more hours than Mr. Jones . Or : Mr. Jones works fewer hours than Mr. Tuan.. 4. Homework : 1 min Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each . _Do exercise 2, 3 at page 45, 46 in workbook. _ Prepare part 4,5.. _ Write in the notebooks . _ Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down . - Correct the mistakes and ask them to write in the notebooks .. _Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each . _Do exercise 2, 3 at page 45, 46 in workbook. _ Prepare part 4,5.. Write homework .. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(165) Period: 46. Unit 7 : The world of work Lesson 6 : The worker (B 4,5 ) Date of prepared: 07/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 08/ 12/2016(Chạy chương trình buổi chiều) Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: After the lesson , Ss will continue to know about some basic jobs and practice listening skill . II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: 1. Vocabulary : _Shop assistant ( n) _ To be on duty _ Annual ( adj ).

(166) 2. Grammar : Review : the present simple tense .. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What does peter do ? + How many hours a week does he work ? + How much time does his vacation last ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. Contents, times 1. Warm up : 6 mins _ Have Ss play a game : Net works : Occupations. 2.Pre_listening : 36 mins _Have Ss predict what Peter / Susoon / Jane / Phong does and howmay huors pen week he or she works , amount of vacation.. T’s Action. Ss’ Action _ Play a game. _ Have Ss play a game : Net works : Occupations _Device the class into 2 groups. _Call 2 students to present for their groups to write down. _Remark .. _Discuss in one minute . _2 students go to the board and write down.. _Predict what Peter / Susan /Jane / Phong does ; how many hours perweek he / she works , amount of vacation. _Have Ss predict what Peter / Susoon / Jane / Phong _Work in groups. does and howmay huors pen _Give the predictions. G1: week he or she works , G2: amount of vacation. _Ask them to work in groups G3: G4: ..

(167) _Call some groups to give their predictions .. 3.While -listening. NAME JOB HOURS VACATION Peter Doctor 70 4 weeks Susan Nurse 50 3 weeks Jane Shop assistant 35 1 week Phong Factory worker 48 2 weeks. S1: What does peter do ? S2 : He ‘s a doctor . S1 : How many hours a week does he work ? S2 : 70 hours S1 ; How much time does his vacation last ? S2 : 4 weeks 4.Post –listening : Example : Peter is a doctor , He works about 70 hours a week . He has 4 weeks’ vacation each year . 5. Consolidation: Ask Ss to use the grids and write about 4 people . 6. Homework : 2 mins Write a paragraph about 4 people in the notebook. _ Do exercise unit 7 in bai tap bo sung .. _Listen to the tape and check the prediction . _Exchange the result . _ Listen to the tape and check the result . _ Give the result . _Ask Ss to listen to the tape and _Write down . check their predictions (2 times ). _Ask Ss to exchange the results with other groups. _Play the tape again for Ss to check their results . _ Practice in pairs . _Call some groups to give their _ Lis ten . results . _Correct and give the corect answers . _ Have Ss practice asking and answering using the grids. _ Make example : _ Have Ss work in pairs . _ Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. _ Remark .  Play with words : _Have Ss read play with words . _ Call on some Ss to read in front of the class . _ Correct the mistake . _Ask Ss to use the grids and write about 4 people . _ Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of the class. Correct the mistake . _Write a paragraph about 4 people in the notebook. _ Do exercise unit 7 in bai tap bo sung .. _ Work in pairs . _ Practice in front of the class. _ Read play with words . _Read in front of the class. _ Write about 4 people .. _ Read the writing in front of the class. _Write homework ..

(168) _ Prepare part 1,2 of unit 8.. _ Prepare part 1,2 of unit 8 .. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period: 48. Unit 8: Places Lesson 1: A -Asking the way ( A1, 2). Date of prepared: 11/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 12/ 12/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: - Asking for and giving directions. II. Language content: 1. Knowledge: 1. vocabulary: - About the position 2. Structure - Could you tell me how to get (go) … ? - Could you show me the way to …?. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:.

(169) +How many subjects do you study at school ? +What do you study in each subject ? +Which Subject do you like / dislike ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Contents, times 1. Presentation: 38 mins A1: Name the place a. State bank of VN: ng©n hµng nhµ níc VN b. Saint paul hospital: BÖnh viÖn Xanh p«n c. Hotel d. The centrel post office e. Hanoi Rail way station: Ga Hµ néi f. Dong Xuan Market A- Are there any similar place in our town? Name these place? Note:Tên riêng đứng trớc Eg: Dong xuan market A2 1. Who are they? 2. Where are they? 3. What does the tourist want? New words - Tourist (n): kh¸ch du lÞch - On the right (prep): ë bªn ph¶i - Opposite (Prep): đối diện - Go straight ahead:®i th¼ng - Sovenir (n): kỉ niệm, đồ lu niÖm - The way (n): đờng. Teacher’s activities. - T. asks ss some question. Students’s activities - Ss answer - SS work in pais. - T. asks ss to look at the picture in page 79 and name these places - SS answer ( Yes, post office, Don, market … ) - T. calls some ss to read the name of places - T. corrects. - From the ss answer, T. introduces some new words. - Then T. asks ss - T. asks ss to look at the picture in page 80 and - SS read in chorus, then answer some questions individual - Ss listen - T. asks ss to read new words - Ss read in chorus. - Then T. asks ss to listen to - Where does the tourist the dial want to go? asks some - Which questions does he -T. comprehension questions - SS work in pairs use? * Structure Cách hỏi đờng và chỉ đờng.

(170) Model: Eg: Could you tell me the way to the zoo? Could you show me how to get to the zoo? - Go ahead. Tale the first street on the lest 2. Practice Picture drill. - T. asks ss to read the model - SS work in pairs (play roles and read the dialogue) - T give a picture and asks ss to ask and answer about the way to some places in - SS work in pairs the picture, using structure above - SS write down. - T. calls some ss to check - Could you tell me the way - T. asks ss to practice the to the zoo? dialogue - Go a head. Turn left at the first cnner - Learn Dialogue - T. correct ss pronunciation structure 3. Production; 5 mins - SS work in pairs - SS write down. new. words. and. - Write the name of office …. - T. draw the position of some places on the board. - Do exercise in W.B 4.Home work : 2 mins Then asks ss to ask and - Learn new words and answer about the way to structure these places - Write the name of office … - Do exercise in W.B - Then T. calls some to read before the class. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(171) Period:. 49. Unit 8: Places Lesson 2: Asking the way - A3,4,5 Date of prepared: 12/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 13/ 12/2016 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: - Reading for details about work and vacation. and about Mr Tuan’s job to compare. Language content: 1.Knowledge: 1. Vocabulary : _ A long way _ Have a guess.

(172) _ Coach 2. Structure : It takes + time + to get ……. How far is it from …….to …….?. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. ntents, times T’s Activities Ss’ Activities Warm up : 5 mins - Play a game : Hangman . ave Ss play a game : Hangman ( 3 + How far rds ) + meter he first word has 6 letters . It is d for asking about distance . + Kilometer he second word has 5 letters . It is d for measuring distances . he third word has 8 letters . It is o used for measuring distance. emark . -Listen to the teacher carefully . New lesson: 38 mins Listen and repeat . Then Guess the meanings , read practice the dialogue with the new words in chorus and partner. -Introduce the aim of the individually then copy down . lesson , then explain some A long way ( n ) new words and structures -Look at the dialogue and.

(173) + Have a guess + Coach ( n ) + It takes about 18 hours to get there by coach . - Ask Ss to look at the Example : dialogue and listen to the How far is it from your house to tape . school ? How far is it from Nam Dinh to Ha Noi ? How far is it from Hue to Ho Chi -Ask Ss some questions about Minh city ? distance using : how far is it How far is it from Hue to Ha noi ? from……….to…………? b. Look at this table of distances in km . Ask and answer questions with a partner. - Make example : - Ask Ss to listen to the tape How far is it from Vinh to Hanoi ? again and read after the tape . It’s about 319 km _ Have Ss work in pairs asking and answerring about the distances . - Call on some pairs to practice in - Have Ss work in pairs reading front of the class . the dialogue . - Correct the mistake if necessary . Ask Ss to write down in the notebooks - Call on some pairs to practice . in front of the class . 3. Consolidation : * Ask Ss to practice in pairs , using the street map about the stores and the table b in language focus 3 , then make - Correct the pronunciation . a conversation about giving direction . - Make example : S1 : Could you tell me how to get to the bookstore from the library ? - Ask Ss to answer the question S2 : Go straight ahead to the park , : take the first street on the left and go along Hue street . The bookstore is betweenthe minimart and the restaurant . S1 : How far is it from the library ? S2 : about 500 meters . - Ask Ss to look at the map and S1 : thank you . the table in the book carefully . S2 : You’re welcome . - Ask them to work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in. listen to the tape . -Answer T’s questions It’s about one kilometer . It’s about 90 kilometers . -Listen to the tape and read after the tape . -Work in pairs reading the dialogue . -Practice in front of the class . -Answer the question : It’s about 1,030 km. It’s about 680 km . -Look at the map and the table carefully . -Listen carefully .. - Work in pairs . -Practice in front of the class. -Write down .. -Listen carefully .. -Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write down ..

(174) t of the class. rrect the mistake and ask them to e down ome work : 2 mins exercise 2 at page 48 in work k. epare part B1. - Write homework .. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period:. 50. Unit 8: Places Lesson 3: B.At the post office (1) Date of prepared: 12/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 13/ 12/2016(Chạy chương trình buổi chiều) Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Tim’s Parents ‘job and the time they work in aweek . They continue practicing reading comprehension . Language content: 1.Knowledge: vocab: Some words about the topic of the post office Structure: How much + does it cost? It cost 1.000 d Ex: How much are there stamp? They are 2.000 dong.

(175) - I would like an envelope. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. Teacher’s activities 1. Warm up: 5 mins - Sing a song - Doing exercise A1, A5 ( w.b). Students’ s activities - Sing a song. - T. calls 2 ss to do exercise A1, A5 in w.b - SS do - T. remarks and gives marks for ss. 3 - New lesson: 38 mins a. Presentation - What do people go to the post office for? - Which servers are there at the pos office? ( Sending letter, postcard, sending/receiving parced, making long, distance, phone calls, buying stamp, enverlope) - T. asks ss to read model * New words chorally then ss make - send (v): göi ®i examples - Post card (n): bu thiÕp - T. introduces the lesson - Envelope (n): phong b× - Stamp (n): con tem (we will hear a - Change (n): tiÒn thõa conversation …) - Altogether (adv): tæng céng, gép l¹i - T. asks ss to listen to the - Local stamp: Tem th trong níc dialogue - Over sea mail: thÎ quèc tÕ. - Using the picture in the book T. asks some questions - SS answer. - SS listen.

(176) - Phone card: ThÎ ®iÖn tho¹i *Structure - T. teaches ss to read new a) Cách đề nghị một cách lịch sự Model: words I would like some stamp to sent this letter b)Hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ gi¸ c¶ Ex: How much is the enverlope? - T. gives some times and It is 1.000 dong Ex: How much does the enverlope cost?ask ss to ask and answer about the price of these It costs 1.000 dong items b. Practice + Dialogue a. Liz will mail the letter to the USA b. She pays 11.500 dong together c. She receive 3.500dong in change + Cues drill 1 post card/ 500 dong 2 enverlope/ 400 dong 10 stamp/ 5000 dong *.While – reading Answer a. Hoa needs some local stamps and some stamps for oversea mail and a phone card b. She needs stamps for oversea mails because she has a penpal in American c. She need a phone card to phone her parens once aweek c. Post – reading - Retelling the dialogue Ex: hoa and Nga are going to the post office. Nga wants to buy some local stamps and some stamps for overseas mail because she has a penpal in America. She also needs to buy a phone card …) - practice structure: I’d like + N Ex: I’d like some stamps * Production Ex: Put the words in the correct order to make sentences a) a local stamp/ cost/ much?. - T. introduces some new words. - Ss read in chorus, then individually. - T. asks ss to practice the dialogue - T. calls some ss check - T. gives some cues and ask ss to answer about the price - SS works in pairs - Then asks ss to answer the questions - SS works in pairs - T. calls some ss to check - SS works in pairs. - T. corrects and gives marks - Sts do - T. calls some ss to - Ss read the dialogue and answer find out the answers for - T. corrects the questions - Then T. asks ss to - Then ss compare with practice the dialogue. their partners answer - SS works in pairs - Ss work individually - T. asks ss to guess about - then T. calls some ss to the things that Hoa and check Nga need - T. asks ss to listen to the - Make sentences dialogue to check their guessing. a- How much does a local.

(177) b) These post cards/ are/ how? c) I/ like/stamps 4. Home work - Learn structure, new words - Read the dialogue. stemp cost? - T. asks ss to read the b- How much are these dialogue silently post cards c- I like these stemps. - Call some ss to practice before the class. T. corrects other ss’s pronunciation - T. asks s to retell the dialogue. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................. Period: 51. Unit 8 : Places Lesson 4: B -At the post office B 2,3 Date of prepared: 12/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 13/12/2016(Chạy chương trình buổi chiều) Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to listening for details to get further practice in post office vocabulary and telling the price 1.Knowledge: Vocabulary: Some words about the topic of the post office Structure: How much + does it cost? It cost 1.000 d Ex: How much are there stamp? They are 2.000 dong - I would like an envelope. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :.

(178) - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. Contents, times 1.- Warm up: 5 mins Sing a song Doing exercise A1, A5 ( w.b). Teacher’s activities. Students’ s activities - Sing a song. - T. calls 2 ss to do exercise - SS do 2 New lesson: 36 mins A1, A5 in w.b + Presentation - Using the picture in the What do people go to the post office - T. remarks and gives marks book or? for ss Which servers are there at the pos - SS answer office? Sending letter, postcard, T. asks some questions ending/receiving parced, making long, distance, phone calls, - T. introduces the lesson (we buying stamp, enverlope) will hear a conversation …) - SS listen. * New words send (v): göi ®i - T. asks ss to listen to the Post card (n): bu thiÕp dialogue Envelope (n): phong b× Stamp (n): con tem - Ss read in chorus, then Change (n): tiÒn thõa individually Altogether (adv): tæng céng, gép l¹i Local stamp: Tem th trong níc - T. introduces some new words Over sea mail: thÎ quèc tÕ Phone card: ThÎ ®iÖn tho¹i.

(179) *Structure a) Cách đề nghị một cách lịch sự - T. teaches ss to read new words Model: I would like some stamp to sent this letter b)Hái vµ tr¶ lêi vÒ gi¸ c¶ - T. asks ss to read model Ex: How much is the enverlope? chorally then ss make It is 1.000 dong examples Ex: How much does the enverlope cost? It costs 1.000 dong - T. gives some times and ask ss to ask and answer about the 2. Practice price of these items + Dialogue a. Liz will mail the letter to the USA b. She pays 11.500 dong together - T. asks ss to practice the c. She receive 3.500dong in change dialogue + Cues drill 1 post card/ 500 dong 2 enverlope/ 400 dong - Then asks ss to answer the 10 stamp/ 5000 dong questions 2.While – reading Answer - T. calls some ss check a. Hoa needs some local stamps and some stamps for oversea mail and a phone card - T. gives some cues and ask b. She needs stamps for oversea ss to answer about the price mails because she has a penpal in American c. She need a phone card to - T. corrects and gives marks phone her parens once aweek 3. Post – reading - Retelling the dialogue Ex: hoa and Nga are going to the post office. Nga wants to buy some local stamps and some stamps for overseas mail because she has a penpal in America. She also needs to buy a phone card …) - practice structure: I’d like + N Ex: I’d like some stamps 3. Production Ex: Put the words in the correct. - SS works in pairs - SS works in pairs - SS works in pairs - T. calls some ss to check - Sts do. - Ss read the dialogue and find out the answers for the questions - Then ss compare with their partners answer - SS works in pairs - Call some ss to practice before the class. T. corrects other ss’s pronunciation - Ss work individually - then T. calls some ss to check - Make sentences. a- How much does a local stemp cost? b- How much are these - T. asks ss to guess about the post cards things that Hoa and Nga need c- I like these stemps. - T. asks ss to listen to the dialogue to check their guessing.. - T. asks ss to read the dialogue silently.

(180) order to make sentences a) a local stamp/ cost/ much? b) These post cards/ are/ how? c) I/ like/stamps. 4. Home work : 4 mins Learn structure, new words Read the dialogue. - T. calls some ss to answer - T. corrects - Then T. asks ss to practice the dialogue. T. asks s to retell the dialogue. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ Period: 52. Unit 8:Places Lesson 5: B –At the post office B4 + B5 Date of prepared: 12/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 13/12/2016(Chạy chương trình buổi chiều) Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: By the end of the lesson , Ss able to listening for details to get further practice in post office vocabulary and telling the price Language content: 1.Knowledge: Vocabulary : - To take care of ( v) -Mechanic ( n ) - Machine ( n ) - To work part- time - Shift ( n) - To play golf - Homeless ( adj ) Grammar : Structure How much is a letter to Americs? It’s 8.000dong. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve..

(181) II- Questions: + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:. Contents, times 1- Warm up: 5 mins - Playing Chain game 2 - New lesson: 36 mins 1. Presentation – Listening B4: page 85. Teacher’s activities. Students’ s activities. - Ss in 2 groups complete - T. gives a sentences the sentences above beginning “ I go to the post asmuch as possible office to buy stamps” - T. asks ss to listen then corrects and raise the answer 2 questions winner. - T. asks ss to say the name 2. While - listening of the object in the picture B4 in page 85 - T. asks ss to guess the price of each items 1. What is the total cost? - T write the price that ss 2. Hoa much change will Mrs Robin have guessed on the board have from 60.000 dong? - T. calls some ss to give the answer - First time: - Second time: - a packet of envelope: 2000 - apen: 1.500 dong - awriting pad: - Five stamp: 2500 - a phone card: 50.000 dong - The total cost is 59.000 dong - She will have 1.000 dong inchange. - T. guess how to do: There are the thing which Mrs Robinson will buy. Now you listen and say the prices of each item as well as the totak cost of all the things. - T. asks ss to answer 2 question above - Ss answer the questions, basing on the answer above. - Ss name: pen, envelope - ss listen and take notes (price of each item) - Then ss listen again and check compare the patner - 1 or 2 ss read the answers. - Ss read the dialogue B3. Then complete it (ss work in pairs).

(182) - T. corrects. B3 page 84: Complete the dialogue - T. asks ss to look at B3 - Call some ss read the page 84 and read complete dialogue before - T. correct and gives the the class answers. Hoa … like … Cleck … are … Hoa … much … Cleck … is … Hoa … here … Cleck … change … * Make up similar dialogue. B5 page 85: Answer the question a part from: ngoµi r. 3. Post – listening; Making a conversation between the hop assistant and a customer. - T. asks ss to make up similar dialogue basing the words in the box - T. asks ss to read the question - T. explains new words in the questions - T. asks ss to work in pairs - T. corrects - T. calls ss to check - T. corrects. - Some ss do - Sts work in pairs - Calls some ss to check then corrects - Ss read the questions - Ss practices asking and answering the questions. - Call some ss to check - Some ss practice before the class - sts play roles and make up the dialogue (conversation) - SS works in pairs. 4.Home work : 2 mins Review grammar points of 8. U1 – U. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(183) Period: 53. REVISION. Date of prepared: 18/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 19/ 12/2016(Chạy chương trình buổi chiều) Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: - Further practice in adjective and adverb, modal verb, like, dislike, why, because, simple present tense, simple past tense, present progressive tense, future tense. Language content: 1.Knowledge: Grammar : Review : the present simple tense. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure:.

(184) Teacher’s activities A - Warm up. Students’ s activities - T. asks some questions - ss answer. B - Checking the old lesson C - New lesson 1. Presentation - T. asks ss to give examples * Review grammar - Ss give examples a) Prtesent simple tense Ex: I live in Luong Son He lives in Luong Son - From the example. T. asks ss to say the I go to school everyday form of the verbs and the use of this tense b) Present progressive tense - diễn tả hành động đang xả ra tại thời ®iÓm nãi - §éng tõ cã d¹ng: V ing Ex: Look! They are playing catch - Ss make example I am watching T.V I am teaching English Note: Verb tobe in this tense - T. take notes for ss - ss listen c. Simple future Ex: I will go to Hanoi tomorrow She will come here this afternoon S + will + V 2. Practice Exercise * Complete the sentences using the verbs: work, be, play, go a. Mr Nhat … to work by bus b. Hoa … in class 7A c. My brother … very naughty d. He … in a factory e. We … badminton everyafternoon - Put the verbs in brackets into correct form “ Now he (not work). He (relax) at home. He (listen) to music and (read) a newspare. He (wait) for the phone call from one of his friends - các câu sau đây đúng hay sai? a. The party will start at 7.00 b. She will busy tomorrow c. You’ll have a lot of friends soon?. - T. asks ss to say the form of the verb and the usage. - T. gives some exercise and asks ss to do - goes - is - are - works - play - isnot working, is relaxing, is listening, is reading is waiting.

(185) d. how will he goes to the zoo? - Put the verbs in brackets into correct form a. I’d like (buy) some stamps b. My father (go) to work at 7.30 every morning c. Lan (read) a book at the moment d. Where you (send) your summer vacation next year? e. Many children enjoy (play) sports f. My school usually (finish) at 11.30 g.It’s seven now. You (be) late for school h. What time she (go) to obed everyday 3. Production 4.Home work. - to buy - goes - is reading - will you spend. - will be - does she go - ss write down. - Review all structure from U1 – U8. VI. Experiences: ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ ................................................................................................................................ .................................................................................................................................

(186) Period: 54. REVISION. Date of prepared: 18/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 19/ 12/2016(Chạy chương trình buổi chiều) Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: - Further practice in adjective and adverb, modal verb, like, dislike, why, because, simple present tense, simple past tense, present progressive tense, future tense. Language content: 1.Knowledge: + Vocabulary : - To take care of ( v) -Mechanic ( n ) - Machine ( n ) - To work part- time - Shift ( n) - To play golf - Homeless ( adj ) + Grammar : 1. How far is it from … to … ? 2. How much is/ are … N/Ns? 3. What a lovely room! 4. It’s fifteen to five 5. I usually go to school … ( adv frequency) 6. Would you like to come to mya school 7. Comparision. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan ..

(187) V. Procedure: Teacher’s activities A - Warm up Net work - Family: parents - School: Class B - Checking the old lesson C - New lesson 1. Presentation - Review grammar/ structure a) How far is … Ex: How far is it from HN to Hoa Binh? It’s about 65 km b) How much … Ex: How much is the pen? It is 1.500 dong How much is / are + N/ Ns? c) Exclamation: - The film is borring - What s boring film What a /an + (adj) + N! d) Time 7.00: Seven o’clock 7.15: a quarter past seven 7.40: twenty to eight e) Adv of frequency Eg: I usually to there by bus He is always by bus f) Would you like + to + V …? Ex: Would you like to come to my house I’d love to.That would be great fun Let’s + V Ex: Let’s go to the zoo * What about + Ving ? Ex: What about going to the movie? g)Comparision Comparative Long – longer Big – bigger Good – better Bad – worse Many – more. Superative The longest The biggest The best The worest The most. Ex: - This ruler is longer than that ruler. Students’ s activities - T. asks ss to play game - Ss play a game. - T. asks ss to say the meaning and give example - ss say - ss make examples. - T. gives some sentences and asks sts to make exclamative sentences - Ss say the form. - T. calls ss to make examples - SS say the position of these adv - Ss to make example. - T. take notes for ss - ss listen - T. asks ss to say the form of the verb and the usage.

(188) - The shirt is more expensive then the dress h) Prepositions + position: - on (the table, the wall …) - in (HN, the hospital …) - at (school, the post office …) + Time: - on (Monday, Tuesday …) - at ( 6 o’clock, …) + To, from … to, next to, behind, on the left,on the right, under … 2. Practice *Chọn đáp án đúng để hoàn thành câu 1. The books … of the librian’s desk are in English a. in the right b. at the right c. on the right 2. We go to school six day a week, from Monday …Saturday a. at b. on c. to 3. … do you pplay sprot afternoon? a. How much b. How often c. how many 4. Could you … me how to get to the book store? a. tell b. speak c. talk * Cho dạng đúng của các tính từ 1. Hoa is (good) student in our class 2. Hanoi is (large) than HoaBinh 3. What is (cold) Month of the year? 4. Is fruit (good) than candy? 5. House in HN are (expensive) than house in HB 3. Production Home work - Review all structure from U1 – U8. - T. gives some exercise and asks ss to do. - 1.c. - 2.c - 3.b. - 4.a 1. 2. 3. 4.. VI. Experiences: .. Period: 55. REVISION. The best Larger The coldest Better.

(189) Date of prepared: 18/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 19/ 12/2016(Chạy chương trình buổi chiều) Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: - Further practice in adjective and adverb, modal verb, like, dislike, why, because, simple present tense, simple past tense, present progressive tense, future tense. Language content: 1.Knowledge: Vocabulary : - To take care of ( v) -Mechanic ( n ) - Machine ( n ) - To work part- time - Shift ( n) - To play golf - Homeless ( adj ) Grammar : Review : - The present progressive tense . - The simple future tense . - Comparative . - Asking and answering about distance . - Exclamation .. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Consolidation and practice : The present progressive tense : - Ask Ss to give the form and use of the present progressive tense :  Form: ( + ) S + am / is / are + V-ing . ( - ) S + am / is / are + not + V- ing . ( ? ) Am / is / are + S + v- ing ?.

(190)  Use : It is used to express an action which is happening at a time at present . It usually goes with adverbs of time such as : now / at the moment / at present . Examples: She is listening to music at the moment . They are playing marbles in the yard now . - Have Ss make sentences as model . The simple future tense : - Have Ss give the form and the use in front of the class . * Form : ( + ) S + Will + V ( without To ) . ( - ) S + Will not + V ( without To ) ( ? ) Will + S + V ( without To ) ?  Use : It is used to express an action or a plan which will happen in the future . It usually goes with adverbs of time such as : Tomorrow , Next week / month / year ….. Example: She will go to Ha noi tomorrow . They will have a party next week . - Ask Ss to make sentences . Comparative : a) Short adjectives : - Have Ss give the form : S1 + Tobe + adj + er + than + S2 . EX: She is taller than me . This ruler is longer than that one . - Have Ss make sentences in front of the class . b) Long adjectives : _ Ask Ss to give the form : S1 + Tobe + more + adj + than + S2 . EX: This pen is more expensive than that one . He is more inteligent than his brother .  Especial cases : Good / well => better Bad / ill => Worse Many / much = > More Little => Less Far => Farther / further . Asking answering about distances : - Ask Ss to give the structure about asking and answering the distances : How far is it from……….to…………..? It’s about …………….km/m EX: How far is it from your house to school ? It’s about 2 km . How far is it from NamDinh to Ha Noi ? It’s about 90 km . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class ..

(191) Exclamations : What + a / an + ( adj ) + N ! What + ( adj ) + Ns ! EX : What a nice picture ! What a cold day ! What naughty boys ! - Have Ss make sentences . 1. Further practice : Exercise 1: Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets . a. Tomorrow ( be ) ………..my birthday , so I would like you to come to my house for dinner tonight . b. You shouldn’t make noise when our teacher ( teach ) ……………….. c. The next Sunday will be Lan’s birthday so I ( buy ) ……………………..a gift for her tonight . d. Chi ( have ) ………………….a lot of English books . e. Minh never ( go ) ………………..to the zoo by bike . f. Listen ! She ( play ) …………………the piano . g. We usually ( play ) ………………….Blindman’s bluff at recess. h. My father never ( drink ) ………………….coffee , but at the moment he ( drink ) ………………….it i. I’d like ( buy ) ……………………some envelopes . j. The children enjoy ( read ) …………………………..picture books . Exercise 2: Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . a. She doesn’t have as many toys as I . => She has ………………………………………………………………….. b. There is less coffee in my cup than there is in your cup . => There is …………………………………………………………………… c. I don’t have so many friends as my sister . => I have ……………………………………………………………………. d. My friends have more candies than I . => I don’t …………………………………………………………………… e. My brother drinks more coffee than my sister . => My sister drinks …………………………………………………………. f. She eats more chocolate than I . => I eat ……………………………………………………………………… g. She has less flour than he has . => He has ……………………………………………………………………. Exercise 3 : Choose the best anser . 1. Hurry or you’ll be late ……………….school . A. with B. for C. at 2. My homework ……………………about two hours each day . A. takes B. has C. gives 3. Our summer vacation starts in june . It ……….almost two months ..

(192) A. happens. B. takes. C. lasts. 4. What do you do ……………the vacation ? A. during B. while C. when 5. We have fun ……………together on the farm . A. working B. work C. to work 6. We don’t have classes on Saturday , but we work one hour ………..each day . A. more B. much C. many 7. Viet namese students have …………vacations than American ones . A. few B. fewest C. fewer 4. Consolidation : Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed . 5. Homework : - Do exercises in the notebooks .. VI. Experiences: ...................................................................................................................................... ...................................................................................................................................... ....................................................................................................................................... Period: 56. REVISION Date of prepared: 19/ 12/2016 Date of teaching : 20/ 12/2016.

(193) Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: ...................................................................................................... I. The aims: - Further practice in adjective and adverb, modal verb, like, dislike, why, because, simple present tense, simple past tense, present progressive tense, future tense. Language content: 1.Knowledge: Vocabulary : - To take care of ( v) -Mechanic ( n ) - Machine ( n ) - To work part- time - Shift ( n) - To play golf - Homeless ( adj ) Grammar : Review : - Adverbs of frequency . - Asking and answering about the price . - Making suggestions . - Invitation. - Asking the way .. 2. Skills :Reading 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + What do you think about Hoa ? + How many periods a day do you have ? + What do you think about students’ life ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , sub-board,lesson plan . V. Procedure: Consolidation and practice : Adverbs of frequency : Always / usually / often / sometimes / seldom / rarely / never …. 2. Ask Ss to say about the position of adverbs : Ex : He always gets up at 5:00 in the morning . I am never late for school . Asking and answering about the price : How much + is / are + S ? => S + is / are + ………. How much + does / do + S + cost ? => It/ They + costs / cost + ……...

(194) Ex : How much does this shirt cost ? => It costs 50,000 dong . How much are these envelopes ? => They are 2,000 dong . Making suggestions : 3. Let’s + V . 4. Should we + V ? 5. How about + V-ing ? 6. What about + V-ing ? 7. Why don’t we + V ?  Agreement : OK / I’d love to /That’s a good idea .  Disagreement : + I’m sorry , I can’t . + I’m sorry , I can’t . I’m busy . + I’d love to but I’m going to……… + Thanks anyway . EX : Let’s go to Lan’ house . Should we play table tennis ? What about going to the movies ? Why don’t we go to the beach ? A. Invitation Would you like + N ? Would you like + to V ? EX : Would you like to go to the concert with me ? Would you like to come to my house for lunch ?  Yes , I’d love to / Yes , please / All right .  No, thanks / I’d love to but I’m busy . Asking the way : - Is there ……near here ? / Where is …….? 8. Could you tell me how to get there ? 9. Could you show me the way to the ……..? 10.How can I get there ?  Go straight ahead / go long this street . Take the first / second street on the left / right ./ Turn right / left . EX : Could you show me the way to the post office ?  Go straight ahead , Take the first street on the right . It is opposite the police station . Buying things : I’d like + N Can I have a/ some + N , please ? I need to buy an English book , please ? 1. Further practice : Exercise 4: Give the correct form of the adj/ adv in parentheses . 1. This house isn’t very modern . I want a ( modern) ………………….one . 2. That building is the ( high ) ……………..one in our town . 3. Nam is a good tennis player . I think he is the ( good ) …………in the club . 4. My bag isn’t very heavy . Your bag is ( heavy ) …………………...

(195) 5. We don’t know many people . You know ( many )………………..people than us . 6. It is a very bad film . It’s the ( bad ) ………….film I’ve ever seen . 7. What is the ( long )……………….river in the world ? 8. Tuan doesn’t work hard . I work ( hard )…………………… 9. She doesn’t know much . Her sister knows much ( much )…………………. 10.They have little freetime but we have ( little )………………………. Exercise 5 : Rearrange the words or phrases to make meaningfull sentences . 1. To/ take/ often/ Mai /minutes / get/ her/ to /bus/ school /it / ten/ by . …………………………………………………………………………………… 2. House / is / it / Minh’s / far / to / apartment / how / from/ Lien’s ? …………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Younger / more / work / hours / my / sister / I / than . …………………………………………………………………………………… 4. Hotel / show / you / me / way / the / to / Bong Sen / Miss / could / the ? ……………………………………………………………………………………. 5. Clerk / would / I / like / fifty/ a / thousand / phone / dong / card . ……………………………………………………………………………………… 6. Grow / farmers / some / but / main / their / crop / rice / is / the / vegetables . ………………………………………………………………………………………. 7. Please / show / me / you / way / the / to /station / nearest / could/ the / police ? ……………………………………………………………………………………….. 8. By / me / it / about / takes / minutes / ten/ to / from / go / my / to / house / my / factory/ bike / often / father’s . ……………………………………………………………………………………… 9. Phone / stamps / would / some / for / Great Britain / a / card / clerk / I / like / and. ……………………………………………………………………………………… 10.Loves / theatre / to / Chi/ going / join/ school/ group / she / acting / much/ is / the / because / very . ……………………………………………………………………………………… 4. Consolidation : Repeat all the structures which the students have reviewed . 6. Homework : - Do exercises in the notebooks . - Review for doing the first semester test ..

(196) Date of prepared: 29/01/2015 Date of teaching : 30/01/2015 Period: : 58 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 1 : A- A holiday in Nha Trang ( A1 ) I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be used to the past simple tense . They will know about some of the irregular verbs and regular verbs . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Aquarium ( n ) - Gift ( n ) - Delicious ( adj ) - To be : was / were - To have => had - To buy => bought - To take => took - To go => went - To talk => talked - To return => returned - To visit => visited 2. Grammar : - The past simple tense . III.Technique : Using pictures , explanation , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork. IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures , tape , cassette . V.Procedure : T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Greetings . - Answer the questions ..

(197) - Ask Ss some questions such as : + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ? - Remark and lead in the new lesson . 2. Presentation : - Ask Ss to look at the picture in the book , then introduce the situation of the lesson . - Explain some new words to Ss : + Aquarium ( n ) : + Gift ( n ) : + Delicious ( adj ) : + To be : was / were ( past ) + To have : had ( past ) + To take : took ( past ) + To go : went ( past ) + To buy : bought ( past ) + To talk : talked ( past ) + To return : returned ( past ) + To visit : visited ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually.  Checking technique : matching - Ask Ss to match the words with their meanings . Gift Aquarium Took Bought Delicious Went Had Returned - Remark and give mark . - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the question : What places did Robinsons visit and what did they do there ? - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and repeat after the tape . - Call on some Ss to give their answers .. - Look at the picture and listen carefully . - Listen and write down . Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually. - Do exercise : matching. One student goes to the board and match .. - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Listen to the tape and read after the tape . - Give the answers ..

(198) - Correct and give the correct answers : - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of - Practice reading in front of the class . the class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Introduce quickly the past simple tense , - Listen carefully and find out then ask Ss to find out the sentences in the sentences in the past . the past . - Ask them to read after the teacher these - Read after the teacher . sentences and verbs . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and - Read the dialogue again and number the sentences . number the sentences . - Ask them to exchange the result with the partner - Exchange the result . - Call on some Ss to give the answer in - Give the answer in front of the front of the class . class . - Remark and give the correct answer : - Write down in the notebooks 1. Liz went to Nha Trang . 2. Liz visited Tri Nguyen aquarium . 3. Liz bought souvenirs . 4. Liz returned to Ha noi . 5. Liz talked to Ba about her vacation . 3. Practice : - Give some cues then ask Ss to practice - Practice asking and asking and answering . answering in pairs . + Vacation / wonderful + Food / delicious + Things / expensive + People / friendly + Nha Trang / beautiful - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in - Practice in front of the class . front of the class . - EX: How was the vacation ? It was wonderful . 4. Production : - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game - Play game : EX: S1: Last vacation I was in ……… S2: Were you in …………? S1: Yes, I was / No, I wasn’t . 5. Homework : - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 - Write homework . lines for each . - Do exercise 1 at page 53 in workbook ..

(199) - Prepare A2.. Date of prepared : 01/01/2014 Date of teaching : 02/01/2014 Period: : 59 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 2 : A – A holiday in Nha Trang ( A2) I.The aims : - Students read the passage for details about the Robinsons’ vacation and practice Wh- questions in the past simple tense . - They continue to practice reading skill. II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Shark ( n ) - Crab ( n ) - Dolphin ( n ) - Cap ( n ) - Turtle ( n ) - Exit ( n ) - To eat => ate - To see => Saw - To think => thought - To wear => wore - Unfortunately - Roadside restaurant - Peaceful - Peanuts - Calm - To drive => drove 2 .Grammar : The past simple tense . III.Technique : Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure :.

(200) T’s Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Palmanism : Go , have , went , talk , bought , had , take , took , talked . - Remark . 2.Pre- reading : - Introduce the lesson : In the last period , we heard Liz telling about her vacation in Nha trang with her family . In today’s lesson , we will read the text about one of the most interesting and memorable activities which Liz and her family did during the vacation – the visit to Tri Nguyen aquarium . - Explain some new words to Ss. + Shark ( n ): + Dolphin ( n ) : + Turtle ( n ) : + Crab ( n ) : + Cap ( n ) : + Exit ( n ) : + To eat => ate ( past ) + To see => saw ( past ) + To wear => wore ( past ) + To think => thought ( past )  Checking technique : What and where * Matching : Eat wore See thought Wear ate think saw - Remark .  Before reading the text , ask Ss to do exercise : T or F prediction . a. The Robinsons went to TN aquarium . b. They saw many different types of fish . c. Liz bought a little turtle . d. They had lunch at a food stall. e. Liz ate fish and crab . - Ask Ss to discuss in groups .. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game in 2 groups .. - Listen carefully .. - Listen and write down . Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .. - Play a game : what and where - One student goes to the board and match .. - Listen then do exercise .. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions ..

(201) - Call on some groups to give their predictions. 3.While – reading : - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check their predictions . - Call some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer : a. T b. T c. F d. T e. F - Have Ss read the text in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the text again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : a. Liz’s parents went to the aquarium with her. b. They saw many different types of fish …. c. They bought a cap in the souvenir shop . d. Yes, she did . She wore the cap all day . e. Yes, they do . Mr and Mrs Robinson ate fish and crab . f. Because she remembered the beautiful fish in the aquarium . 4.Post – reading : - Ask Ss to tell the story of Liz’s trip to TN aquarium , using the pictures . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and tell thestory , using the pictures . - Remark and give marks .. - Look at the book and listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Read the text in front of the class. - Read the text again and find out the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Write down in the notebooks .. - Look at the pictures and retell the story . - Some Ss go to the board and tell the story .. - Have Ss play a game : Bingo + Ask Ss to write the verbs in the past simple - Play a game . tense . Write the verbs in the past + Read : Went , bought , had , took , talked , simple tense . returned , visited , wore , ate , saw , thought . + Remark . - Call one student to go to the board and retell the story of Liz’s trip to Nha trang . - One student goes to the - Remark and give mark . board and retell the 1. Pre – listening . story . - Introduce the situation of the listening , then ask Ss to read 5 pairs of sentences in the book - Listen to the teacher carefully.

(202) . - Explain some new words to Ss . + Unfortunately ( adv ) >< Fortunately ( adv ) + Peaceful ( adj ) : + Calm ( adj ) : + Roadside restaurant ( n ) : + Peanuts ( n ) : + To drive => drove ( past )  Checking technique : Rub out and remember . - Ask Ss to read the sentences again and guess which sentences they are going to hear . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions .. and read the sentences . -Listen and write down . Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually, then copy down .. - Play a game : rub out and remember . - Read the sentences then guess .. 2. While – listening : - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and check their prediction .( 2 times ) - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Play the tape again and ask Ss to check the answers. - Correct and give the correct answers . b, d , e , h , j Exercise : Complete the passage . - Give the predictions . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and complete the passage . - Listen to the tape and check the Liz was excited as the bus …1……..through the predictions . countryside . Everything …..2……. calm and - Give the answers . peaceful. At 4 o’clock the bus …3…… at a small - Listen to the tape again roadside restaurant . Mrs Robinson …..4…… some and check the answers . peanuts and an ice cream for Liz . The bus …5 . …. in - Listen and copy down . Ha noi at about 7 p.m . - Call some Ss to give the results which they have heard . - Listen to the tape and - Correct and give the correct answers : complete the passage . 1. drove 2. looked 3. stopped 4. bought 5. arrived 4.Post – listening : - Have Ss work in pairs interviewing Liz about her family’s trip back to Hanoi . EX: + How did you travel back to Hanoi ? +What did you see on the way back ? - Give the answers . +How did everything look ? - Copy down . +Were you tired ?.

(203) +When did you arrive in Hanoi? 5.Homework : - Learn by heart new words by writing 2 lines for each . - Write the story about Liz’s trip . - Do exercise 2 at page 53 in workbook .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the. - Write a passage about Liz’s family’s trip Date of prepared : 03/01/2014 Date of teaching : 04/01/2014 Period: : 60 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 3 : A- A holiday in Nha Trang ( A3,4,5 ) I.The aims : The Students will read Ba’s diary to understand the details and talk about past activities Students cotinue to practice reading skill. II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - To keep in touch - To teach => taught - To rent => rented - To improve => improved - To move => moved 2. Grammar : The past simple tense . III.Technique : Explanation , brainstorming , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook . tape , cassette , sub- board . V.Procedure T’s Activities. Ss’ Activities. 1-Warm up : - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks. - Greetings . - Play a game : Networks 2 teams take part in the game .. Regular verbs. Irregular verbs.

(204) Looked. bought. - Devide the class into 2 teams - Remark . 2.New activities : a) Read Ba’s diary . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words : + To keep in touch ( v ) : + To rent ( v ) => rented ( past ) + To move ( v ) => moved ( past ) + To teach ( v ) => taught ( past ) + to improve ( v ) => improved ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation .  Exercise : T or F prediction 1) The Robinsons are American . 2) Mr Robinson works at a hospital in Hanoi . 3) They rented a house next door to Ba’s . 4) They moved to a new apartment last week . 5) Liz and Ba are the same age . - Ask Ss to work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions - Ask Ss to read Ba’s diary then check their prediction . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1.T 2. F 3. F 4. T 5. T - Call on some Ss to read the diary aloud . - Ask Ss to read the sentences from a to g , then read the diary again in order to correct the false sentences . - Have Ss exchange the results with the partner . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write the true sentences . - Correct and give the correct answers . a) Liz lived next door to Ba . b) Liz learned Vietnamese in Viet nam . c) Ba collects stamps. d) Liz’s aunt lives in New York .. - Students go to the board and write .. - Listen to the teacher and write down . Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually then copy down .. Do exercise in groups .. - Give the predictions . - Read the diary and check the predictions . - Give the answers .. - Read the diary aloud . - Correct the false sentences . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Go to the board and write . - Copy down ..

(205) e) The Robinsons moved to the other side of hanoi . f) The Robinsons moved . Now Ba is sad / unhappy . g) Ba will see Liz next week .  Play with words . - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book and say about these activities . - Ask them to look at the book and listen to the tape . - Have Ss read after the tape . - Call on some Ss to read aloud . 3.Consolidation : - Ask Ss to imagine Liz is their new friend . Write a letter to one of their friends to tell him or her about Liz and her family . EX: Dear………, I’m glad to tell you that I have a new friend . Her name is Liz . She is American . ………. - call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class . - Remark .. - Look at the pictures and say about them . - Listen to the tape . - Read after the tape . - Read aloud . - Write a letter to a friend about Liz and her family .. - Read the letter in front of the class .. - Write homework . 4.Homework : - Write again the letter in the exercise book . - Do exercise 4 at page 54 in workbook . - Prepare part B1,2..

(206) Date of prepared : 05/01/2014 Date of teaching : 06/01/2014 Period: : 61 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 4 : B- Neighbors ( B1,2 ) I.Aims : After the lesson , the students will practice the past simple tense in negative and interrogative forms and short answers to talk about past activities . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Hairdresser - Neighbor - Dressmaker - Material -To make => made - To cut => cut 2.Grammar : The past simple tense in negative and interrogative . III.Technique : Explanation , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board , picture . V.Procedure : T’s Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Pelmanism come , improve , wore , came , received , improved , receive , wear , teach , taught . - Demonstrate the group which is winer . 2. New activities : A. Listen . then practice with a partner . - Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess what they are doing . - Introduce : Lan and Hoa are friends . they are talking . Now you listen to the tape and. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game : Pelmanism. - Look at the picture and guess . - Listen to the teacher ..

(207) tell me what they are talking about . - Play the tape for Ss . - Explain some new words to Ss : + Hairdresser ( n ): + Dressmaker ( n ) : + Neighbor ( n ) : + Material ( n ) : + To make ( v ) => made + To cut ( v ) => cut - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . * Checking technique : Rub out and remember .. - Listen to the tape . - Listen and write down . Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down . - Play a game : Rub out and remember . - Listen to the tape again , then answer the question .. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again then answer the question . - Correct and give the correct answer : They are talking about Hoa’s hair , dress . - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and read after - Read after the tape . the tape . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue -Practice in front of the class. in front of the class . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find - Read the dialogue again out the answers for the questions . and find out the answers . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in - Practice asking and front of the class . answering in front of the - Correct and give the correct answers : class . a) She is a hairdresser . - Copy down . b) She is a dressmaker .  Answer : - Introduce the form of short answers . - Listen . - Make model sentences : - Listen and write down . + Did Hoa buy the dress ? No, she didn’t . + Did her aunt cut her hair ? Yes , she did . - Ask Ss to practice in pairs using the - Work in pairs . information in the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of - Practice in front of the the class . class . - Remark . 3. Consolidation : _ repeat the form of short answer of the past simple - Listen to the teacher ..

(208) tense . - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game . EX: Yesterday I went to a ……and I bought a/ an ….. + Did you go to ………..? + Did you buy ………….? - Remark . 4. Homework : - Learn by heart new words by making sentences with them . - Do exercises 1,2 at page 55, 56 in workbook . - Prepare part 3,4 .. - Play a game : Guessing game Write the sentences in a paper sheet . - Write homework ..

(209) Date of prepared : 08/01/2014 Date of teaching : 09/01/2014 Period: : 62 UNIT 9 : AT HOME AND AWAY Lesson 5 : B – Neighbors ( B 3,4 ) I.Aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will read the text for details to understand Hoa’s sewing work and further practice in WH- questions to talk about past activities . Practice reading and writing skills . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Hobby - To sew - Sewing machine - To decide => decided - Cushion - To try => tried - Useful - To fit => fitted 2.Grammar : The simple past tense . Wh – questions to talk about past activities . III.Technique : Explanation , asking and answering , pairwork and groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , casstte , sub- board , picture . V.Procedure : T’s Activities Ss’Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions : - Answer the questions . + What did you do lastnight ? + Did you watch TV ? + Did you do your homework ? + What time did you go to bed ? - Remark . 2.New activities : A. Read . Then answer ..

(210)   1) 2) 3) 4) 5). a) b) c) d) e) f) g) h) i) B.. - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words : + Hobby ( n ) : + Sewing machine ( n ) : + Cushion ( n ) : + Useful ( adj ) : + To sew ( v ) : + To decide ( v ) => decided ( past ) + To try (v ) => tried ( past ) + To fit ( v ) => fitted ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation . Checking technique : What and where . Exercise : T or F prediction . Hoa decided to learn how to sew . She didn’t buy some material. She made a cushion for her armchair . Next, She made a shirt . It was blue with white flowers on it . - Have Ss do exercise in groups - Call on some groups to give their predictions - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the results . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. F - Call on some Ss to read the passage aloud . - Ask Ss to read the passage again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers She learned how to use a sewing machine . She made a cushion for her armchair first . It was blue and white . Next , she made a skirt . It was green with white flowers on it . It looked very pretty . She tried it on but it didn’t fit . Hoa’s neighbor helped her . Finally, It fitted very well. Write . Put the verbs in brackets in the simple. - Listen then write down . Guess the meaning , read new words in chorus and individually , then copy down .. - Play a game : what and where .. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . - Listen to the tape and check the predictions . - Give the results . - Read the passage aloud . - Read the passage again and find out the answers - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Copy down ..

(211) past tense . - Introduce the aim of the exercise to Ss . - Listen to the teacher . - Ask Ss to read the sentences . - Read the sentences in - Ask them to complete the sentences with the the book . form of the verbs in the past simple tense . - Complete the sentences . - Have Ss exchange the results with the - Exchange the results partners . with the partner. - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write - Go to the board and down . write down . - Correct and give the correct answer : - Copy down . Watched – bought – cut – used – decided – was – made – was – wasn’t – helped – fitted 3.Consolidation: - Repeat the form of Wh- questions : - Listen to the teacher Wh- + did + S + Verb….? carefully . EX: Where did you buy this shirt ? I bought it in the shop . What did you do lastnight ? I watched TV . - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and - Work in pairs asking answering using Wh – questions . answering using wh- Remark . questions to talk about 4.Homework : past activities . - Learn by heart part remember by making sentences with them . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 56,57 in workbook . - Write homework . - Prepare language focus.

(212) Date of prepared : 12/01/2014 Date of teaching : 13/01/2014 Period: : 63 LANGUAGE FOCUS 3 I.Aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will practice the past simple tense , prepositions of places , “ How much “ “ How far “ to talk about the price and distance , comparatives with more , less and fewer . II. Language content : - The past simple tense . - How much is it ? - Prepositions of places . - Comparatives . III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board . V.Procedure : 1.. 2. A. a). T’s Activities Warm up : - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions about what they did lastweek . EX : What did you do last weekend ? Did you go to the library ? Did you visit you grandparents ? Consolidation and practice : How much is it ? Work with a partner . Read the dialogue . - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Ask ss to repeat the structure to ask and answer about the price . -. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Answer the questions .. - Read the dialogue in pairs. - Give the structure asking.

(213) Ex : How much is the green dress? = How much does the green dress cost ? b) Now make similar dialogues . - Ask Ss to use the information in the table to make similar dialogues . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class. - Correct the mistake .. 2) Prepositions : - Have Ss give the prepositions of places . - Ask Ss to look at the map . Write the location of each store . EX: The clothing store is on Hai Ba trung street . It’s near the shoe store to the right . - Call some Ss to say about the location of the stores. - Remark . - Call one student to give the structure of asking and answering the distance .. answering the price : + How much is/ are + S ?  It/ They + is / are +…. + How much + do / does + S + cost ? => It costs / They cost ….. - Make similar dialogues . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. S1: How much is the blue hat ? S2: It’s 15,000dong . S1: What about the yellow hat ? S2: It’s 12,000 dong . - Give the prepositions of places. - Write the location of each store . - Read the location of the stores. + The bookstore is on Hue street. It’s between the restaurant and the minimart. - Give the structure of asking and answering the distance .: How far is it from……to…….? - Ask Ss to use the information in the table It’s about …….. to work in pairs : one asks and one answers - Work in pairs . . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of - Practice in front of the class. the class. S1: How far is it from the shoe store to the minimart ? S2: It’s 500 meters . S1: How far is it from the clothing store to the bookstore ? S2: It’s 450 meters . 3) Past simple tense :.

(214) a) Write the past form of the verbs . -Ask Ss to write the past form of the verbs . - Call on one student to go to the board and write down . - Correct and give the correct answer : + Buy => bought + help => helped + Remember => remembered + take => took + send => sent think => thought talk => talked b) Complete the sentences . Use the words in the box . - Ask Ss to use the words in the box to complete the sentences . - Call on some Ss to do exercise . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1) Played 2) Talked 3) bought 4) Worked 5) Sent - Ask Ss to write down . 4) Simple tenses : - Have Ss to look at Nga’s diary then complete the dialogue . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to role play in front of theclass . - Correct the mistake and give the key : Nga: Everyday I clean my room , help my mom and study English . Minh : What did you do yesterday ? Nga : I cleaned my room, helped my mom, studied E , watched TV , played volleyball and stayed at Hoa’s house. Minh: How about tomorrow? Nga : I’ll study E, clean my room, help my mom, see a movie, visit my grandmother and buy new shoes . 5)More , less , fewer . - Ask Ss to repeat the use of more , less and fewer .. - Write past form of the verbs . - Write on the board . - Write in the notebook .. - Complete the sentences with the given words . - Do exercise in front of the class. - Write down .. - Complete the dialogue. - Work in pairs . - Role play in front of the class .. - Repeat the use of more, less and fewer . - Look at two refregeratos.

(215) - Ask Ss to look at the two refregerators and write sentences , using more , less and fewer . - Call on some Ss to go to the board and write down . - Correct and give the correct answers : + Before there were more bananas , Now there are fewer bananas . + Before there was more milk . Now there was less milk . 3.Further practice : - Have Ss do test yourself in workbook. 4.Consolidation : - Repeat the structures which Ss have learnt . 5. Homework : - Redo all exercises in the exercise book . - Prepare part A1- unit 10.. and write sentences . - Go to the board and write down . - Copy down .. - Do test yourself 3 . - Listen to the teacher . - Write homework ..

(216) Date of prepared : 15/01/2014 Date of teaching : 16/01/2014 Period: : 64 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 1: A- Personal hygiene ( A1 ) I.Aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will read a letter to understand the details about Hoa and her family . they will cotinue to practice the simple present and the simple past tenses . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Harvest - To take morning exercises - Helpful - To iron - To hope - Probably - To polish - To comb - To change - Sandals - Pants - To drink => drank 2.Grammar : - The simple present tense - The simple past tense . III.Technique : Brainstorming , explanation , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , picture. V. Procedure : T’s Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Brainstorming :. Ss’ Activities - Greetings ..

(217) Likes….. Class…. Work in groups .. From…. Lives with….. Live in….. - Ask Ss to discuss about Hoa in groups . - Call on 2 groups to demonstrate their discussion in front of the class . - Remark and lead in new lesson . 2.New activities : - A -Introduce the lesson then explain some new words : + Harvest ( n ): + Helpful ( adj ) : + To take morning exercises : + To hope ( v ): + To iron ( v ): + Probably ( adv ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss play a game : what and where in order to check new words . - Ask Ss to order the sentences of Hoa’s mom’s letter . a. Your dad and I hope you’re fine . b. I hope you’re taking care of yourself . c. I received a letter from your aunt last week . d. I miss you a lot . e. Don’t forget to write . f. Your grand father talks about you a lot . - Call some Ss to give their predictions . - Ask Ss to look at the letter and listen to the tape , then check their predictions . - Call some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers :. - Demonstrate the discussion . - Listen and write down . Guess the meanings , read new words in chorus and individually the copy down in the notebook .. - Play a gmae . - Order the sentences .. - Give their predictions . - Look at the book and listen to the tape , then check the predictions . - Give the answers . _ Read the letter aloud ..

(218) 1- a 2- f 3- c 4- b 5- d 6- e - Call on some Ss to read the letter in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the letter again then find out the answers for the questions in the book . - Have Ss work in pairs .  Have Ss play a game called lucky numbers : 1) Who helps Hoa’s parents on the farm ? 2) LN 3) What does Hoa’s mother want her to do? 4) Why are Hoa’s parents busy ? 5) LN 6) What does Hoa’s mother want her not to do ? 7) How is Hoa different now ? 8) When will they go to Hanoi ? - Remark and ask Ss to write the answers in the notebooks . B. :Listen :  Pre- listening : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures then introduce the aim of the lesson to Ss . - Explain some new words to Ss . + To polish ( v ) : + To change ( v ): + To comb ( v ) : + Pants ( n ) : + Sandals ( n ) : + To drink ( v ) => drank ( past ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Ask Ss to predict the order of the pictures . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions .  While- listening : - Play the tape for Ss and ask them to check their predictions . ( 2 times ) - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Play the tape again and check . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. a 2.e 3. f 4. d 5. g 6. c 7. h 8. b  Post – listening : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and tell what Hoa did yesterday . EX: Yesterday , Hoa got up, she took a shower and. - Read the letter again to find out the answers for the questions . - Work in pairs . Play a game : lucky numbers . ( Answer the questions ). - Write the answers in the notebooks . - Write a letter to Hoa’s mother . - Exchange the letter with the partner . - Read the letters in front of the class . - Look at the pictures carefully and listen to the teacher .. Guess meanings , read new words in chorus and imdividually then copy down . - Predict the order of the pictures . - Give the predictions . - Listen to the tape and check the predictions . - Give the answers . - Listen to the tape again and check the answers . - Copy down ..

(219) put on her clothes ………. - Call on some Ss to tell what Hoa did yesterday in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . 3.Consolidation: - Ask Ss to imagine they are Hoa . Write a letter to her mother . - Go around the class and provide the help - Have Ss exchange the letter with their partners . - Call on some Ss to read their letters in front of the class . - Correct the common mistakes . - Remark . 4.Homework : - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Rewrite the letter in the exercisebook . - Do exercise 1 at page 61 in workbook . - Prepare part 2.. - Look at the pictures and tell what Hoa did yesterday . - Some Ss tell about Hoa in front of the class .. - Write homework ..

(220) Date of prepared : 17/01/2014 Date of teaching : 18/01/2014 Period: : 65 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 2: A- Personal hygiene ( A2 ,3) I.The aims : The students continue to practice about personal hygiene through the listening and reading the diary . Practice listening and speaking skills . By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to write a letter to reply and talk about the routine and hygiene . Practice writing skill . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : 2.Grammar : Review the past simple tense Review the simple present tense and past simple tense III.Technique : Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure : T’s Activities. Ss’ Activities. 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Wordsquare . D I D B N. Z K O O T. S A W U N. E J C G E. N C K H W. T B A T E. E D A M R. X G A V E. - Greetings . - Play a game . - 2 groups take part in the game .  Went, came , ate , saw , gave , did , took , made ,.

(221) was , bought , were , sent , cut , won , had . -Ask Ss to find the past tense of irregular verbs - Remark . A. Read Nam’s diary . - Ask Ss to look at Nam’s diary and tell about Nam’s daily routines . - Call on one student to read Nam’s diary . - Have Ss work in pairs asking answering - Read Nam’s diary . about Nam’s daily routines . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Work in pairs . - Ask them to write a diary about themselves - Practice in front of the based on Nam’s diary . class. - Ask them to exchange their writing with the partner . - Write a diary based on Nam’s . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about themselves . - Exchange the writing - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in with the partner . front of the class. - Work in pairs . - Remark . B- Write - Practice in front of the - Ask Ss to talk about Hoa’s mom letter . class . - Give some cues or questions : + Did Hoa get a letter from her mother ? + Did her mom visit her after the harvest ? - Write about yesterday’s + Can Hoa take care of herself ? activities . + Does she get up early every morning ? - Read the writing in front + Des she go to bed late ? of the class . + Will she write to her mom soon ? _ Talk about Hoa’s mom letter . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Remark . - Ask Ss to look at the letter in the book then complete the letter with the suitable words . - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner . - Work in pairs . - Call on some Ss to give the result in front - Practice asking and of the class . answering in front of the - Correct the mistake and give the correct class. answers . - Complete the letter . Was , having , show , take , get , go , wash ,.

(222) iron , eating , told , see/ meet , go . - Ask Ss to write down . - Exchange the result with - Ask Ss to work in groups of four writing the partner . the letter on the posters . - Give the answers in front - Call on some groups to read the letter in of the class . front of the class . - Ask Ss to put their letters on the board then compare their work . 3.Consolidation : - Ask Ss to write a letter to their penpal - Copy down . telling what they do everyday . - Work in groups of four . - Go around class and provide help . - Call on some Ss to read their letters in front - Read the letters in front of the of the class . class . - Remark . - Put the letters on the - Ask sts to read the remember board . 4.Homework : - Write a passage about Hoa’s activites using - Write a letter to a penpal . the pictures in the book . - Do exercise 3 at page 62 in workbook . - Read the letter aloud . - Write the letter in the notebook . - to read the remember - Do exercise 3,4 at page 63 in workbook . - Prepare part B1 . - Write homework.

(223) Date of prepared : 19/01/2014 Date of teaching : 20/01/2014 Period: : 66 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 2: A- Personal hygiene ( A4) 1. Aims: Help Ss talk about habits and routines 2. Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to talk about habits and routines 3. Language Contents :  Vocabulary: health, personal hygiene, harvest, helpful, strange, carefully  Grammar : Simple Present tense , Simple Past tense 4. Techniques : Q & A, True/ False, pairwork, groupwork 5. Teaching aids : pictures, textbook, sub board 6. Procedures : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1. Revision 5’ T has Ss ask and answer about what they did yesterday _ T corrects Ss’mistakes + Remark 2.Warm up 4’ _ T asks Ss some questions 1. Do you get up early? 2. What time do you get up? 3. Do you do morning exercises everyday? 4. Do you wash and iron your own clothes by. STUDENTS’ ACTIVITIES S1:_ What did you do yesterday? S2:_ I …. Answer the questions Ind. Work.

(224) yourself? 3.Presentation 12’ _ T asks Ss : 1. Do you remember Hoa? 2. Where does she live? 3. Who does she live with? 4. Where do your parents live?  Introduce the lesson Pre- teach vocab  personal hygiene (n)  health (n)  harvest (n)  to help (v) -> helpful (a)  strange (a) 4.Practice 15’ Read the letter _ T has Ss read the letter silently and Answer the questions _ T helps Ss to practise _ T corrects Ss’answers The answers: a. Because it is almost harvest time. b. Hoa’s grandfather does. c. After the harvest d. She gets up early and does morning exercises everyday. e. Hoa’s mother wants her to do her own washing and ironing. She doesn’t want her to eat too much candy and stay up late. _ T asks Ss some questions about Hoa 1/ Where does Hoa live? 2/ Does she get up early? 3/ Does she take morning exercises? 4/ What does Hoa’s mother want her to do and not to do? A4 _ T has Ss read the letter (A4). Answer the questions. Listen and repeat Take notes. Read Choral/ Ind. Ind. Work pairwork (share). groupwork.

(225) _ T explains the request _ T has Ss use the verbs (warm up) to complete the letter _ Monitor to the Ss _ T corrects Ss’answers 5.Production 6’ _ T asks Ss to say True/ False, if False, correct it. 1. Hoa wrote this letter. 2. Her parents are working hard. 3. Hoa never likes to get up early in Hanoi. 4. Her aunt washes and irons Hoa’s clothes. 5. Her mother wants Hoa to eat much candy. 6. Her parents will visit Hoa after the harvest.. 6.Summary 2’ * Ss retell what they've just studied 7.Homework 1’ + Learn the vocab + Read A1 and answer the questions again (writing). Keys: was, having, show, take, get, go, wash, iron, eating, told, see. Correct false sentences 1/ F 2/ T 3/ F 4/ F 5/ F 6/ T.

(226) UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson 3 : B- A bad tooth ache ( B1 ) I.The aims : After the lesson , Ss will be able to tell about a visit to the dentist . They will be used to asking and answering about this topic . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Dentist ,To fill , Appointment ,To hate , Drill , To hurt , Cavity , Scared 2.Grammar : - The simple present and past tense - What’s the matter ? = What’s wrong ? III.Technique : Explanation , eliciting , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , picture . V Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Hangman Matter , Worry , tooth , Feel - Remark . 2.New activities : - Ask Ss some questions such as : + What will you do if you have a tooth ache? + When you go to the dentist , what will the dentist do ? - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : What’s the matter with Minh , the boy in the picture ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game .. - Answer the questions .. - Look at the picture then answer the questions . - Listen and write down ..

(227) explain some new words to Ss . + Dentist ( n ) : - Guess the meaning , read + An appointment ( n ) : new words in chorus and + Scared ( adj ) : individually , then copy + Cavity ( n ) : down . + To fill ( v ) : + To hate ( v ) = to dislike ( v ) + To hurt ( v ) : + Drill ( n ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and - Play a game : Slap the individually . board . * Checking technique : Slap the board . - Two groups take part in - Ask Ss to listen to the tape and answer the the game . questions : - Listen to the tape , then + What is Minh going to do at 10:30 ? find the answers . +What happened to Hoa last week ? + How did the doctor help Hoa ? - Play the tape for Ss . - Listen to the tape . - Play the tape again and ask Ss to read - Read after the tape . after the tape . - Ask Ss to answer the questions above . - Answer the questions . - Correct and give the correct answers . - Listen . - Have Ss work in pairs reading the - Work in pairs . dialogue . - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in - Practice in front of the front of the class . class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again and find - Read the dialogue again out the answers for the questions . and find out the answers . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Work in pairs . - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers - Play a game in groups . 1.Why did Hoa go to the dentist last week ? 2What is wrong with Minh ? 3.LN 4.Does Minh like going to the dentist ? How do you know ? 5.Are you scared of seeing the dentist ? 6.LN 7.What did the dentist do with Hoa’s toothache ? 8.What did you do the last time you had a bad toothache ? 9.LN 10.How does Minh feel after talking with Hoa ?.

(228) - Demonstrate the result . - remark . - Ask Ss to write the answers in the notebooks . 3.Consolidation : - Have Ss play a game : Find someone who? EX : S1: Do you have a toothache ? S2 : Yes / No S1 : Do you like going to the dentist ? - Remark . 4.Homework : - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 1 at page 63 in workbook . - Prepare part B2,3 .. Answer the questions .. Listen and write home work. ..

(229) Date of prepared : 09/02/2014 Date of teaching : 10/02/2014 Period: : 67 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGIENE Lesson4: B- A bad tooth ache ( B1,2 ) I-Aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about Dr Lai’s job . They continue to practice about the topic of toothache . Practice listening and reading skills . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - To explain ,To remind ,Sensibly Surgery, To smile, To check ,To notice 2.Grammar : Review : the simple present tense III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board . V. Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . Ask Sts do the exercise: Fill in the blanks to make the words 1/ t __ __ th 2/ c __ v __ __ y 3/ d __ nt __ st 4/ t __ __ th __ ch __ 2.New activities : a/ Listen,Then practice with a partner - Ask Ss some questions such as :. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . 1/ tooth/ teeth 2/ cavity 3/ dentist 4/ toothache - Write the answers in the notebooks ..

(230) + What will you do if you have a tooth ache? + When you go to the dentist , what will the dentist do ? - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : What’s the matter with Minh , the boy in the picture ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss . + Dentist ( n ) : + An appointment ( n ) : + Scared ( adj ) : + Cavity ( n ) : + To fill ( v ) : + To hate ( v ) = to dislike ( v ) + To hurt ( v ) : + Drill ( n ) : - Two groups take part in the game . - Listen to the tape , then find the answers . - Listen to the tape . - Read after the tape . - Answer the questions . - Listen . - Work in pairs . Practice in front of the class b/Listen and answer - Introduce the situation of the listening . - Ask Ss to read the questions in the book then guess the answers for the questions . - Call on some groups to give their answers. - Play the tape for Ss checking their predictions . - Explain some new words to Ss. + To explain ( v ) : + To remind ( v ) : + Sensibly ( adv ) : + Surgrey ( n ) : + To smile ( v ) : + To notice ( v ) : + Serious ( adj ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and. Ask and asnwer in front of the class .. - Listen to the teacher . - Read the questions in the book and guess the answers ( work in groups) - Give the predictions . - Listen and check the predictions . - Listen and write down . Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meaning then copy down .. - Listen to the tape to check the predictions . - Give the answers . - Check the answers . - Write the answers in the notebooks .. - Look at the picture and answer the questions ..

(231) a. b. c. d.. individually . - Play the tape again for Ss. - Ask Ss to give the answers . - Play the tape again for Ss checking the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers . Dr Lai is a dentist . She wears uniform to work . Most children feel scared when they come to see Dr Lai . She explains what will happen. She gives them advice . - Ask Ss to write down .. 2. Consolidation : Repeat the content of the lesson . 3. Homework : - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercises 2 at page 65 in workbook . - Prepare part 3,4,5 .. - Give the answers . - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Read the text in silent . - Read the text aloud .. - Read the story aloud .. - Listen to the teacher . - Write homework ..

(232) Date of prepared : 19/01/2014 Date of teaching : 20/01/2014 Period: : 68 UNIT 10 : HEALTH AND HYGYIENE Lesson 5: B- A bad tooth ache ( B 3,4, 5,6 ) I-Aims : The students continue to practice speaking about health and hygiene , using simple present tense . II. Language content : - Practice vocabulary about health and hygiene . - The present simple tense . III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , using pictures . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures , V.Procedure - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game - 2 groups take part in the game .. Health and hygiene. Take morning exercises. - Go to the board and write down ..

(233) - Call on students from 2 groups to go to the board and write down . - Remark. 2.New activities : a/Listen and read . - Tell what happened to - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer Minh . the questions : - Listen to the teacher . + What is the matter with Minh ? + How does he feel ? + What is the doctor doing ? + Why does that happen to Minh ? - Call on some Ss to give their answers . - Work in pairs . - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape ( two times ) - Have Ss read the text in silent . - Practice in front of the - Call on some Ss to read the text in front of class . the class . - Listen and write down . - Ask Ss to complete the story with suitable words . - Have Ss exchange the results with their partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes then give the answer key : Minh is very nervous and Dr Lai notices this . She smiles to Minh and tells him not to worry . She explains one of his teeth has a cavity . He has to brush them regularly . After Dr Lai fills his tooth , Minh leaves . He is very pleased - Listen to the teacher . - Call on some Ss to read the completed the story aloud . - Look at the pictures and the example b/Ask and answer qurstions with a partner . Use the words to help you . - Ask Ss to tell what happenned to Minh . - Introduce the way to make sentence and the question : why and the answer to Ss . - Make example : Minh’s tooth hurts . Why ? Because he has a cavity . - Write sentences . - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and model then work in pairs asking and answering - Exchange the result with.

(234) based on the pictures and the words given . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answer . a. Minh is nervous . Why ? Because he is seeing the dentist . b. the cavity is not serious . Why ? Because it is small. c. Minh is happy . Why ? Because his teeth are OK. - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . c/Write . Complete this poster with a partner . - Introduce the situation and the aim of the exercise to Ss. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and examples. - Have Ss look at the pictures and write sentences as model . - Ask them to exchange the results with the partner. - Call on some Ss to give their ideas in front of the class . - Correct the mistake . 3.Consolidation : - Ask Ss to work in groups discussing the question: What should we do and what shouldn’t we do if we want to have healthy teeth? - Go around class and provide the help. - Call on some Ss from some groups to present their ideas in front of the class. - Remark and give marks . 4. Homework : - Write the poster : what should we do and shouldn’t do if we have healthy teeth ? - Do exercise 4 at page 65 in workbook . - Prepare unit 11 – A1. the partner . - Give the ideas in front of the class. - Write down . - Work in groups .. - Demonstrate their ideas in front of the class. - Write homework ..

(235) Date of prepared : 16/02/2014 Date of teaching : 17/02/2014 Period: : 69 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY. Lesson 1 : A- A check – up ( A1 ) I-Aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the content of the dialogue and give the requests and the reponses . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Medical check – up - To measure - Medical record - To weigh - Height - Weight - Temperature - To take one’s temperature - Scales - Normal 2.Grammar : - The structure : Would you + V ? - Review the simple present tense III.Technique : Explanation, using pictures , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : + Do you eat much candy ? + Do you often eat ice- creams? + How often do you brush your teeth ? + If you have healthy teeth , what should you do ? - Remark and lead in new lesson .. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Answer the questions ..

(236) 2. New activities: - Ask Ss to look at the picture and guess : - Look at the picture and Where are they ? answer the questions . What are they doing ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson , - Listen to the teacher . then explain some new words to Ss . + Medical check- up ( n ) : + Medical record ( n ) : + Height ( n ) : + To measure ( v ) : read new words in chorus and + To weigh ( v ) : individually , guess the meanings , + Temperrature ( n ) : then copy down . + To take one’s temperrature + Scales ( n ) : + Normal ( adj ) : + Structure : Would you open your mouth , please ? Would you + V ? - Play a game : rub out and - Have Ss read new words in chorus and remember . individually . - Guess the order of the  Checking technique : Rub out and remember . sentences . - Have Ss guess the content of the - Give the predictions in dialogue and order the sentences . front of the class . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions - Look at the books and in front of the class . listen to the tape . - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to - Read the dialogue and the tape then check their order . check the predictions . - Ask them to read the dialogue again and give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1.F 2.D 3. C 4. G 5. E 6. A 7. H 8. B - Ask Ss to write the correct answer in the notebooks. - Write the correct answers . - - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class . - Practice in front of the - Correct their pronunciation . class .  Comprehension questions : -Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1. What were the students of QT school doing ? - Play a game : 2. LN 3. Who was doing the medical check – up ? 4. What did the nurse do ?.

(237) 5. LN 6. What was Hoa’s temperature ? Was it normal? 7. What was her height ? 8. What was her weight ? How heavy was she ? . Take- RemarkOpen your Fill in the form 3.Consolidation : temperature mouth - Ask Ss to use the structure : Would you + V ? Get onby theplayingMeasure to make the sentences a game :your Sit down scales height Noughts and crosses . Wait in the Speak Ah waiting room Give name !Unexpected End of Formula. Answer the questions 2 groups take part in the game . - Play a game :Noughts and crosses. Make sentences with the cues .. - Make example : Would you open your mouth , please ? Remark . 4.Homework: - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 66 in workbook . - Write homework . - Prepare part 2, 3 ..

(238) Date of prepared : 19/02/2014 Date of teaching : 20/02/2014 Period: : 70 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Lesson 2 : A- A check – up ( A 2 ) I.-Aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female 2. Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ? III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , casstte . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities 1. Warm up :7’ - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board Normal. - Greetings . - Play a game : Slap the board .. Medical record. Medical check up. Height. Ss’ Activities. Weigh. Measure Scales. 2 groups take part in the game ..

(239) - Demonstrate the group which wins the game . 2.New activities :35’ A. Listen . Then write the missing words . - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the missing words . - Have Ss listen to the tape for the first time. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and find out the words to fill in the blanks . - Ask Ss to exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Have Ss listen to the tape again and check their answers . - Correct and give the correct answers . Doctor : I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa . How old are you ? Hoa : Fourteen . Doctor : And your height is one meter 50 centimeters ? Hoa : No. I think I’m shorter . The nurse measured me . Doctor : Oh . How tall are you ? Hoa : One meter 45 centimeters . Doctor : I will ask the nurse to check your height again . How heavy are you ? Hoa : I think I’m 42 kilograms . Doctor : No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilograms . - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue with the partner . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . B. Ask and answer questions with a partner . - Introduce the situation of the exercise to Ss and explain some questions : + Which school does he go to ? + What is his surname ? + How tall is he ? = What’s his height ?. - Clap the hands .. - Listen to the teacher carefully . - Read the dialogue and guess the missing words . - Listen to the tape carefully . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Listen to the tape again and check the answers . - Listen and copy down .. - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Listen to the teacher and write down ..

(240) + What’s his weight ? = How heavy is he ? - Ask Ss to work in pairs : One is A , the other is B asking and asnwering the information to complete the medical record . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . - Ask Ss to complete the form in their notebooks . 3.Consolidation :2’ - Have Ss play a game : Survey . - Ask Ss to work in groups : Ask their friends in order to have information and write in the form .. - Work in pairs .. - Some pairs pratice in front of the class . - Complete the form in the notebooks . - Play a game . - Work in groups .. - Call on some groups to practice in front of the class . - Practice in front of the 4.Homework :1’ class. - Do exercise 3,4 at page 67 in workbook . - Prepare part A3 . - Write homework.

(241) Date of prepared : 21/02/2014 Date of teaching : 22/02/2014 Period: : 71 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Lesson 3 : A- A check – up ( A3 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions.

(242) - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I.-Aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . II. Language content : 3. Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female 4. Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ? III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , casstte . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance - New lesson: T’s Activities 2. Warm up :7’ - Greetings . Checking up 2.New activities :35’ C. Listen . Then write the missing words . - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and guess the missing words . - Have Ss listen to the tape for the first time. - Ask Ss to listen to the tape again and find out the words to fill in the blanks . - Ask Ss to exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Have Ss listen to the tape again and check their answers . - Correct and give the correct answers .. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . 2 groups take part in the game .. - Clap the hands .. - Listen to the teacher carefully . - Read the dialogue and guess the missing words . - Listen to the tape.

(243) Doctor : I want to ask you a few questions before I start, Hoa . How old are you ? Hoa : Fourteen . Doctor : And your height is one meter 50 centimeters ? Hoa : No. I think I’m shorter . The nurse measured me . Doctor : Oh . How tall are you ? Hoa : One meter 45 centimeters . Doctor : I will ask the nurse to check your height again . How heavy are you ? Hoa : I think I’m 42 kilograms . Doctor : No. It says on your form that you’re 40 kilograms . - Ask Ss to practice the dialogue with the partner . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . D. Ask and answer questions with a partner . - Introduce the situation of the exercise to Ss and explain some questions : + Which school does he go to ? + What is his surname ? + How tall is he ? = What’s his height ? + What’s his weight ? = How heavy is he ? - Ask Ss to work in pairs : One is A , the other is B asking and asnwering the information to complete the medical record . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary . - Ask Ss to complete the form in their notebooks . 3.Consolidation :2’ - Have Ss play a game : Survey . - Ask Ss to work in groups : Ask their friends in order to have information and Name write Male/Fe Age . Weight Height in the form. -. carefully . Exchange the result with the partner . Give the answers in front of the class . Listen to the tape again and check the answers . Listen and copy down .. - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice the dialogue in front of the class . - Listen to the teacher and write down .. - Work in pairs .. - Some pairs pratice in front of the class . - Complete the form in the notebooks ..

(244) - Play a game . - Call on some groups to practice in front of - Work in groups . the class . - Practice in front of the 4.Homework :1’ class. - Do exercise 3,4 at page 67 in workbook . - Prepare part B1 . - Write homework. Date of prepared : 26/02/2014.

(245) Date of teaching : 27/02/2014 Period: : 72 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Lesson 4 : B – What was wrong with you ? ( B1 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I.Aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to ask and asnwer questios about sickness and further practice in the past simple , question forms and negative forms . II. Language content :.

(246) 1. Vocabulary : - Bad cold - Sick note - Headache - Virus - Stomachache - Flu 2. Grammar : - The simple past tense : question forms and negative forms . - Structures : What is/ was wrong with SB ? I have/ had a headache . She has / had a bad cold . III.Technique : Explanation , eliciting , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :7’ - Greetings . - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions about themselves . - Answer T’s questions . EX: How tall are you ? What’ s your weight ? How old are you ? …………….. - Remark and give marks . 2.Presentation :35’ - Introduce the situation of the lesson the - Listen to the teacher and explain some new words and structures : copy down . + To have a bad cold : a headache . Read new words in chorus and a virus . individually , guess meanings flu . then copy down . a stomachache . + To be sick = to be ill . + Sick note ( n ) : Have Ss play a game - Make sentences : Structures : What is / was wrong with SB ? What was wrong with her ? EX: What was wrong with you ? She had a bad cold . I had a headache . 3.Practice : a/ Listen, then practice with a partner: - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and answer - Look at the pictures and.

(247) the questions : + Look at balloon 1 : Lan wasnot there . She was absent . What do you think Mr. Tan is asking Lan? What was wrong with her ? ( look at balloon 2 ) - Ask Ss to read the dialogue and answer the questions . - Call on some Ss to answer the questions in front of the class . - Have Ss listen to the tape and look at the books then check the answers. - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice the dialogue in front of the class. - Correct their pronunciation. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and answering the questions in the books . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer the questions in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers : a) Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because she had a bad cold . b) She had a headache . c) Mr. Tan tells Lan to stay inside at recess . d) The doctor said that Lan had a virus . e) The doctor wrote Lan’s sick note . - Ask Ss to copy down . b/Take a survey - Introduce the aim of the exercise . - Ask Ss to work in groups of four and ask them to choose a secretary for their group. - Have Ss use the table B2 to take a survey EX: Were you absent from school last semester ? Did you have a cold ? a stomachache ? the flu ? a toothache ? -Ask the secretaries to give the results of their groups . - Combine the result for the whole class .. answer the questions .. - Read the dialogue in silent to find out the answers . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Listen to the tape and check the answers . - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class. - Copy down .. - Work in pairs .. - Listen . - Work in pairs ..

(248) - Ask Ss to answer the questions : What was the most common illness? What was the least common illness? - Remark . 4.Production : - Give some cues and ask Ss to practice in pairs . You / a cold . She / toothache . Lan / headache . He / flu . Ba / Stomachache . Make example : S1 : What was wrong with you ? S2: I had a cold . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Remark . 5. Homework :1’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 71 in workbook . - Prepare part 2,3 .. - Practice in front of the class. Write homework .. Date of prepared : 28/02/2014 Date of teaching : 01/03/2014 Period: : 73 UNIT 11 : KEEP FIT , STAY HEALTHY Lesson 5 : B – What was wrong with you ?( B4,5 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students:.

(249) I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :. - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the symptoms of the common cold and the cues to prevent it . Practice readind skill. II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Disease - Symptom - Runny nose - Slight fever - To cough - To sneeze - To prevent - To relieve - Cure => to cure - To disappear 2.Grammar : The simple present tense III.Technique : Explanation , eliciting , pairwork , groupwork ..

(250) IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , picture . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities 1. Warm up :7’ - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Guessing game - Ask Ss to write a disease which they caught last time in a paper sheet . - Have one student go to the board and others guess . - Remark , ask Ss some questions about the disease they caught and lead in the new lesson . 2.Pre- reading :35’ - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss . + Disease ( n ) : BÖnh + Symptom ( n ) : TriÖu chøng + Runny nose ( n ) : Sæ mòi + Slight fever ( n ) : Sèt nhÑ + To cough ( v ) : Ho + To sneeze ( v ) : H¾t h¬i + To relieve ( v ) : Lµm gi¶m + To prevent ( v ) : Ng¨n ngõa + To disappear ( v ) : BiÕn mÊt + Cure ( n ) = > to cure : Ch÷a trÞ - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Have Ss play a game : rub out and remember in order to check new words . - Have Ss work in groups discussing the questions : + Why do people call the cold “ common “? + What are the symptoms of the common cold ? - Call some Ss from groups to give their discussion in front of the class . 3.While – reading : - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their discussion . - Have Ss read the text in silent .. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game : guessing game . - All class take part in the game .. - Listen to the teacher carefully . Read new words in chorus and individually , then guess the meanings and copy down .. - Play a game . - Work in groups .. - Give the answers in front of the class . - Look at the books and listen to.

(251) - Call on some Ss to answer the prethe tape . questions . - Read the text in silent . - Have some Ss read the text aloud . - Answer the questions . - Correct their pronunciation . - Read the text aloud . - Have Ss read the text again and find out the answers for the questions in the book. - Ask Ss to work in pairs asking and - Read the text again and asnwering the questions . find out the answers . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of - Work in pairs . the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct - Practice in front of the answers : class . a) Because every year millions of people catch it . - Copy down . b) They are : a runny nose , a slight fever , coughing and sneezing . c) No, there is no cure for the common cold . d) No, these medicines don’t cure a cold , but they relieve the symptoms . e) We can prevent a cold by eating well , doing exercise , keeping fit and staying healthy . 4.Post – reading :2’ - Ask Ss to write about the common cold . - Call on some Ss to read their writings in front of the class . - Write about the common - Remark . cold . 5.Homework :1’ - Read the writing aloud . - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 4 at page 73 in workbook . - Write homework. - Prepare unit 12- A1.

(252) Date of prepared : 28/03/2016 Date of teaching : 29/03/2016 Period: : 77 UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT! Lesson 1 : A – What shall we eat ? ( A1 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?.

(253) 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to understand the details and practice food vocabulary . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Spinach - Durian - cucumber - Papaya - Pineapple - Ripe -To smell 2 2.Grammar : - The simple present tense . - The structure : I’d like……. So do I / I do , too Neither do I / I don’t , either . III.Technique : Explanation , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities 1. Warm up :7’ - Greetings .. Ss’ Activities - Greetings ..

(254) 2.. . 1) 2) 3). - Have Ss play a game : Kim’s game . ( Use the pictures or words written on the board of : fish , chicken , beef , milk , bananas, apples , carrots , oranges ) - Call the students to go to the board and write again . - Remark and lead in the new lesson . New activities : 35’ - Ask Ss some questions such as : + Do you usually go to the market ? + Who do you often go to the market with ? + What do you often see / buy at the market ? ……………….. - Introduce the situation of the lesson to Ss and ask Ss to guess what Hoa and her aunt bought at the market . - Have Ss look at the pictures and listen to the tape . - Ask Ss to look at the book and read after the tape . - Explain some new words and structures to Ss . + Spinach ( n ) : Rau ch©n vÞt + Cucumber ( n ) : Da chuét + Papaya ( n ) : Đu đủ + Pineapple ( n ) : Qu¶ døa + Durian ( n ) : Qu¶ sÇu riªng + Ripe ( adj ) : chÝn + To smell ( v ) : ngöi thÊy / cã mïi Structures : + I like spinach and cucumbers .  So do I / I do , too. + I don’t like pork .  Neither do I ./ I don’t , either . Have Ss play a game : What and where . - Ask Ss to read the dialogues in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice reading in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask Ss to read the dialogues again to find out the answer in the book . - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers What did Hoa and her aunt buy at the market ? LN. Does Hoa like pork? How about her aunt ?. - Play a game .. - Go to the board and write . - Answer T’s questions .. - Listen to the teacher and guess what they bought . - Look at the pictures and listen to the tape . - Read after the tape . - Listen and write . Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meanings and copy down .. Make sentences as models. Play a game . - Work in pairs . - Practice reading in front of the class . - Read the dialogues again to find the answer . - Play a game in 2 groups ..

(255) 4) LN. 5) What meat would they like for dinner ? 6) What are the favorite vegetables of Hoa’s aunt? 7) LN Take the numbers and answer the 8) What fruit did they buy ? questions . 9) Why didn’t they buy a papaya ? 10) LN - Demonstrate the group which wins the game . - Ask Ss to write the answer in the - Clap the hands . notebook 3. Consolidation : 2’ - Write the answers in the - Have Ss talk about the food they like and notebook . dislike . - Ask Ss to work in group of four making - Talk about the food . real conversations about shopping . - Work in groups making - Call on some groups to practice in front of conversations . the class . - Practice in front of the - Remark and give marks . class . 4. Homework :1’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write homework . - Do exercise 1 at page 74 in workbook . - Prepare part 2 ..

(256) Date of prepared : 28/03/2016 Date of teaching : 29/03/2016 Period: : 78 UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 2 : A – What shall we eat ? ( A2,4 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ?.

(257) + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to use the structures : I don’t like …..either , I like ……too / neither do I , So do I to express references . Practice speaking skill . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : Review food vocabulary . 2.Grammar : 3 - I like …..too / So do I . 4 - I don’t like ……either / Neither do I . III.Technique : Explanation , pairwork , groupwork , IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities Warm up :7’ - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks - Call on 2 students from 2 groups to go to the board and write down . - Remark . 2.Presentation :27’ A2: - Explain some sentences of Hoa and her aunt in the dialogues .. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game .. - Go to the board and write down . - Listen to the teacher ..

(258) - Model sentences : S1: I don’t like pork . S2: Neither do I / I don’t either . S1: I like spinach and cucumbers . S2: So do I / I do , too. ( So and too are used in the formative sentences . Neither and either are used in the negative sentences .) EX: S1: I am a student . S2: So am I / I am , too . S1: I like beef . S2: I do , too . / So do I . S1: She isn’t a doctor . S2: I am not , either . / Neither am I . S1: I don’t like chicken . S2: I don’t , either / Neither do I . ( Not either = Neither ) 3.Practice : - Give some pictures or given words to Ss to practice . + Carrots . X + Beef V + Papaya V + Cabbage X + Fish X + Chicken V - Have Ss work in pairs using the structures they have just learnt and given words . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . - Have Ss practice in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . A4:10’ T asks Ss some questions 1/ What would you like for breakfast/ lunch/ dinner?. Copy down .. - Practicing using given words .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . S1: I don’t like carrots . S2: Neither do I / I don’t , either S1: I like beef . S2: So do I / I do , too. - Write down . - Practice in pairs ( free ) - Practice in front of the class . - Take a survey . - Listen ..

(259) 2/ What did you eat and drink Practice in groups . yesterday? T asks Ss to write what they ate yesterday _ Monitor to the Ss For breakfast, Ex: For lunch, For breakfast, I ate a loaf of bread For dinner, … and drank a glass of milk. _ Call on some Ss to write on the board and check. T has Ss complete the sentences, using: “so/ neither/ do does” 1/ I like beef, and ___ does my sister. 2/ They don’t play soccer. ___ we. 3/ I don’t know how to cook. ___ my sister. 4/ They like fish. ___ I. 5/ He doesn’t like carrots and ___ I. 5. Homework :2’ - Learn by heart the structures Listen to the teacher and Write by making 3 sentences with homework . each . - Do exercise 2,3 at page 74 in workbook . Prepare part 3,5 ..

(260) Date of prepared : 03/03/2016 Date of teaching : 04/03/2016 Period: : 79 UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 3: A – What shall we eat ? ( A 3a, 5 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I . The aims :.

(261) After the lesson , Ss will understand how to make a meal by making some dishes . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - To slice - Bowl - To boil,- To heat - To stir- fry - Soy sauce - Spoon 2.Grammar : The past simple tense III.Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson:. - Chopsticks. T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :7’ - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions : EX: Do you like chicken? - Greetings . Beef ? - Answer T’s questions . Do you know how to prepare a meal ?  Lead in the new lesson . 2.New activities :37’ A3:Read . then answer the questions . - Ask Ss to look at the pictures - Look at the pictures and and answer the question : answer the question . What is she doing ? - Call on some Ss to give the - Listen to the teacher . answer . - Introduce the situation and explain some new words to Ss . Read new words in chorus and + To slice ( v ) individually , guess the meanings , + To boil ( v ) : then copy down . + To heat ( v ) : + To stir – fry ( v ) : + Bowl ( n ) + Chopsticks ( n ) + Soy sauce ( n ) :.

(262) + Spoon ( n ) : Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss play a game : Rub out and remember in order to check new words . - Have Ss guess the order of the statements : a) First , she sliced the beef . b) Then she cooked some rice and boiled some spinach . c) Hoa’s aunt cooked dinner . d) Next, she sliced some green pepers and onions . e) And then she set the table and the family sat down to eat . f) After that she stir- fried the beef and vegetables . g) Finally , she sliced the cucumbers and made cucumber salad . - Ask Ss to work in groups ordering the sentences . - Call on some groups to give their prediction - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape then check the order . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer : 1. C 2. A 3. D 4. B 5. F 6. G 7. E - Have Ss read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud . - Ask Ss to work in groups to write the menu - Call on some groups to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answer :. - Play a game . - Do exercise .. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . - Listen to the tape and check the order .. -. Read the text in silent . Read the text aloud . Work in groups . Give the answers . Write down .. - Read the text again and complete the sentences . - Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the answers . - Write down . - Match the sentences with the pictures . - Exchange the result with the partner ..

(263) + Cucumber salad with onions . + Boiled spinach + Stir- fried beef with green pepers and onions + Rice - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the answer key : 1. Slice 2. slice 3. heat 4. stirfry 5. add 6. cook 7. add - Ask Ss to match the completed sentences with the pictures . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and ask Ss to write down . 1. C 2. F 3. A 4. D 5. B 6. E 7. G A5: Play with words - T read text and explain new words if any. - Call on some Ss to read the text in front of class.. - Give the answer . - Write down . - Answer the question . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write a short paragraph . - Read the writing in front of the class .. -. - Listen and read the text. 4.Homework : 2’ - Listen and copy - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 5 at page 76 in workbook . Prepare B1 . Date of prepared : 06/03/2016 Date of teaching : 07/03/2016 Period: : 80 UNIT 12 : LET’ S EAT ! Lesson 4: B – Our food ( B1 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017.

(264) Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I.The aims : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know why Ba had to go to the doctor’s and the reason which caused Ba’s stomachache . II. Language content : The structures : - It must be ………….. - It was probably ……… - Make + somebody + Adj/ Do smt . - Thepast simple tense and present simple tense . III.Technique : Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork..

(265) IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up : 8’ - Have Ss play a game : - Play a game . Guessing game . - All class take part in the ( Each student writes a sentence game . about the disease they had last time . One student goes to the board and the rest guess ) - Remark and lead in the new - Look at the picture lesson . carefully . 2.New activities :34’ - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : - Give the predictions . Where is Ba ? - Look at the book and listen What is the matter with him ? to the tape . - Call on some Ss to give their - Give the answers . predictions . - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Listen to the teacher and - Call on some Ss to give the copy down . correct answers . + Ba is at the doctor’s . + He has an awful stomachache . - Make sentences using the - Explain some structures to structures . Ss . - Work in pairs . + It must be something you ate . - Practice reading the dialogue + It was probably the spinach . in front of the class . + That dirt can make you sick . + These medicine will make - Play a game you feel better. - Have Ss make sentences with the structures . 2 groups take part in the game . - Have Ss read the dialogue in pairs ..

(266) - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct their pronunciation .  Comprehension questions : - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers . 1. What did Ba eat last night ? 2.Who washed the spinach ? 3.LN 4.Why did Ba go to the doctor? 5.Did his parents eat spinach ? 6.LN 7.What made him sick ? 8.What did the doctor give him ? -Remark and state the group which wins the game .  Now complete the story . - Ask Ss to complete the story based on the dialogue above . - Have Ss exchange the result with the partner . - Call on some Ss to give the result in front of the class . - Correct and give answer key : Ba went to the doctor because he was sick . The doctor asked Ba some questions . Ba said he had some spinach last night . The doctor said he must wash the spinach more carefully/well. Vegetables can be dirty . The dirt can make people sick . She / the doctor gave Ba some medicine to make him feel better . - Call on some Ss to read the story in front of the class . 3.Consolidation :2’ - Repeat the content of the lesson and the structures . 4.Homework :1’ - Learn by heart the structures by making 3 sentences with. - Clap hands . - Complete the story . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the result . - Copy down .. - Read the story aloud .. - Listen carefully .. - Listen to the teacher - Write homework ..

(267) each . - Do exercise 1,2 at page 76,77 in workbook . - Prepare part B2.. Date of prepared : 08/03/2016 Date of teaching : 09/03/2016 Period: : 81 UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 5 : B – Our food ( B2 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar :.

(268) The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about a balanced diet . They will know what they should do to have a healthy lifestyle. II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Balanced diet - Energy - To affect - Body- building food - Moderate - Dairy product - Amount - Cereals - Lifestyle - Plenty of 2.Grammar : III.Technique : Explanation , using pictures or real objects , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance - New lesson: T’s Activities 1. Warm up : 15’ - Greetings .. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - do the Test 15 minutes.

(269) - Ask student do the Test 15 minutes - Ask Ss some questions such as : + What do you usually have for breakfast / lunch / dinner ? + What is your favorite food ? - Listen to the teacher . To help Sts checking up the old lesson. 2. New activities :28’ - Introduce the situation : “ Food plays an important part in our life . It gives us the main energy for body development . thus , a - Listen and write . balanced diet is especially important . In our today’s lesson , we will learn about the definition of a balanced diet and useful Read new words in chorus and guidelines about food” individually , guess meanings , then - Explain some new words and copy down . phrases to Ss. + Balanced diet ( n ) + To affect ( v ) + Moderate ( adj ) => Moderation ( n ) + Amount ( n ) : + Energy ( n ) : + Body- building food ( n ) : + Dairy product ( n ) : - Play a game . + Cereals ( n ) : + Lifestyle ( n ) - Do exercise . + Fatty food ( n ) : Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually. - Have Ss play a game : Rub out and remember . - Ask Ss to do an exercise : T or F - Work in groups . prediction - Give their prediction. What does a balanced diet mean? - Look at the book , listen to 1) Eat a lot of meat . the tape and check the 2) Eat a little fruit and vegetables . prediction . 3) Eat a moderate amount of sugar . - Give the answers . 4) Eat a little fatty food . 5) Eat plenty of food you like . - Have Ss discuss in groups . - Call on Ss to give their discussion - Read in silent ..

(270) . - Ask Ss to look at the book , listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answer : 1. F 2. F 3. T 4. T 5. F - Have Ss read the passage in silent . - Call on 3 or 4 students to read the passage aloud . - Ask Ss to read the passage again and find out the answers for the questions . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the answer key : a) Sugar adds taste to food and it gives you energy . b) A balanced diet is not enough all people need exercise to keep a healthy life . c) Ss’ Answers . 3. Consolidation :1’ - Ask Ss to do an exercise : Matching - Ask Ss match and talk about a balanced diet . - Make example : To have a balanced diet we should eat a lot of fruit .......... - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their discussion in front of the class . - Remark 4. Homework :1’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write a menu for yourself and your family .. - Some Ss read the passage aloud . - Read the passage again to find out the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Write the answers in the notebooks . - Do exercise . - Do exercise then talk about “ a balanced diet “ - Listen . - Work in groups . - Give the discussion in front of the class . Write homework .. - Listen to the teacher and copy.

(271) Prepare B3,4,5 .. Date of prepared : 14/03/2014 Date of teaching : 15/03/2014 Period: : 82. UNIT 12 : LET’S EAT ! Lesson 6 : B- Our food ( B3,4,5) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :.

(272) - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I . The aims : The students will listen to a text for details and further practice in food vocabulary . They continue to practice listening skill . II . Language content : - Review the food vocabulary . - The past simple tense III.Technique : Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities 1. Warm up :6’ - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board . Moderate. Amountt t. Energy Dairy product Affect Balanced diet. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game : Slap the board . 2 groups take part in the game ..

(273) Clap the hands - Look at the pictures and call the names of the things . - Have 6 students from 2 groups take part in the game . - Remark and state the group which wins the game . 2. Pre – listening :36’ - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and call the names of the things in the pictures. - Call on 3 or 4 students to give their answers - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers . a. Rice b. Noodles c. Fish d. Vegetables e. Fruit f. Beef g. Juice h. Water - Introduce the aim of the listening , then ask Ss to predict what Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for their lunch . - Have Ss work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their prediction 3. While – listening : - Ask Ss to look at the book and listen to the tape , then check their prediction . - Play the tape for Ss ( two times ) - Ask Ss to exchange the result with the partner . - Play the tape again for Ss to check . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the answer. - Listen to the teacher - Work in groups . - Give the prediction . - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Listen to the tape again and check the result . - Write down . - Write what Lan , Ba Nga and Hoa had for lunch . - Read the writings aloud - Play a game in 2 groups . - Answer the questions using the information in the listening ..

(274) key : Lan : f, b, d ,g Nga : a, d ,g Ba : c, a , e , h Hoa : b , e,g. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and write what Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for lunch . - Call on some Ss to read their writing aloud - Remark . 4.Post – listening : - Have Ss play a game : Lucky numbers 1) What did Lan have for lunch ? 2) LN . 3) Did Ba have some fruit ? 4) Who had vegetables ? 5) LN 6) Who drank juice ? 7) What did Ba drink ? 8) Did Hoa have fish ? - Remark . 5. Homework : 2’ - Write a paragraph about Lan , Ba , Nga and Hoa had for lunch . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 77,78 in workbook . - Prepare language focus 4 .. - Listen to the teacher and copy.

(275) Date of prepared : 16/03/2014 Date of teaching : 17/03/2014 Period: : 83 LANGUAGE FOCUS 4 Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids:.

(276) Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I.The aims : The students do exercises in order to practice the structures which have been learnt , they will use them and apply to do exercises well . II. Language content : - The simple past tense . - Indefinite quantifiers : A little / a lot of / lots of / too much . - Too / either / neither / so . - Imperatives . III.Technique : Eliciting , asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , sub- board , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1. Warm up :6’ - Greetings . - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : - Answer T’s questions . + What did you do yesterday ? + Did you watch TV last night ? + What did you do during last summer vacation ? …………….. - Remark and lead in new lesson . 2.Consolidation and practice :37’ 1) Past simple tense : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures in the book - Look at the pictures and answer and answer what they are doing . what they are doing . - Call on some Ss to answer the questions - Answer the questions . in front of the class . a) Watch TV . b) Eat at a restaurant . c) Go to the movie theatre . d) Read books . e) Play soccer . - Have Ss answer the questions , using the pictures . - Make example :.

(277) S1: Did you do your homework last night ? S2: No, I didn’t . I watched TV . - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers . f) Did you eat dinner at home on Wednesday ? No, I didn’t . I ate dinner at a restaurant . g) Did you go to school yesterday ? No, I didn’t . I went to the movie theatre . h) Did you watch a video on the weekend ? No, I didn’t . I read books . i) Did you play basketball yesterday ? No, I didn’t . I played soccer . - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks . 2)Indefinite quantifiers : - Have Ss repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use . - Ask them to do exercise 2 .  Write the correct expression . - Ask Ss to write the correct expression , using the pictures . - Call on some Ss to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : + A little coffee . + A lot of salt . + A lot of tea . + Too much water . + A little sugar - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .  Complete the dialogues : - Have Ss look at the pictures and then complete the dialogues . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . 3+ 4) Too and either / So and neither . - Ask Ss to repeat the use of too/ so / either and neither . - Have Ss practice the dialogues in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front the class .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write down .. - Repeat the indefinite quantifiers and the use . - Do exercise . - Write the correct expression . - Give the answer . - Write down in the notebooks .. - Look at the pictures and complete the dialogues . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. - Repeat the use of too, either , so and neither . - Practice the dialogues in pairs . - Practice in front of the.

(278) - Have Ss play a game : Noughts and Crosses. class - Play a game .. 2 groups take part in the game . Make sentences with the words , using too, so , either and neither .. - Remark and ask Ss to write sentences in the notebooks. EX: S1: I like mangoes . S2: So do I / I do , too . S1: I don’t like bananas . S2 : I don’t , either / Neither do I . 5) Imperatives : - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and complete the instructions . - explain some new words : + To Peel ( v ) + To mix ( v ) + Vinegar ( n ) - Call on some Ss to give their result in front of the class . - Correct and give the answer key : a) peel e) Add b) Wash f) Stir c) Slice g) Wait d) Mix 3.Consolidation :2’ - Repeat the structures which the students have learnt . 4. Homework :1’ - Do test yourself 4 in workbook. Date of prepared : 19/03/2014 Date of teaching : 20/03/2014 Period: : 84. - Write down . - Look at the pictures and complete the instructions . - Listen and write down .. - Give the answer . - Write down in the notebooks .. - Listen carefully .. Write homework ..

(279) UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 1 : A – Sports ( A1,2 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I.The aims : By the end of the lesson , Ss will be able to know about the ten most popular sports which teenagers in the USA like best and know the names of some sports . They will know how to change from adjectives to adverbs. II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary :.

(280) - Skate boarding - Roller- skating - Roller – blading - Baseball - Surprisingly - Surprising result . - To win - Competition - Prize - Participant 2.Grammar : Review the simple past tense and simple present tense . III.Technique : Eliciting , using pictures , pairwork , groupwork . IV.Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson T’s Activities 1. Warm up :7’ - Greetings . - Ask Ss some questions such as : + Do you like playing sports ? + What sport do you play ? + When do you play …….? + Who do you often play with ? + What do you think about ………? ……………. - Remark and lead in new lesson . 2.New activities :36 A) Listen and read . Then answer the questions . - Introduce the situation of the lesson and ask Ss to look at the pictures then answer the questions : What are they doing ? - Explain some new words : + Skate boarding ( n ) : + Roller- skating ( n ) : + Roller- blading ( n ) : + Baseball ( n ) : + Surprising result ( n ) : + Surprisingly ( adv ) : - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Have Ss play a game : Slap the board . - Have Ss discuss in groups about the. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Answer T’s questions .. - Listen to the teacher , look at the pictures and answer the question . - Listen and write down . - Read new words in chorus and individually , guess meaning then copy down .. - Play a game - Work in groups ..

(281) question : What sports do you think are the most popular in the USA ? - Call on some groups to give their prediction . - Ask Ss to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their prediction . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Ask Ss to read the text in silent . - call on some Ss to read the text aloud . - Have Ss answer the question : What is the most popular sport in the USA ? Which sport is at 11th position ? - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . B) Read . Then answer the questions . - Ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question: what kind of sports in the picture ? What is WFF? WTS? - Call on some Ss to answer . - Ask Ss to read the text and check the answer. - Explain some new words to Ss. + To win ( v ) => won + Prize ( n ) : + Participant ( n ) : A person who take part in the game . - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Ask Ss to read the text in silent . - Call on some Ss to read the text aloud. - Correct the pronunciation . - Have Ss work in pairs to ask and answer the questions . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers . a) He takes part in WFF. b) His school team won the first prize , they were so happy and wanted to keep this activity . c) One activity is a 5 walk to the beach on Sunday. - Give the prediction . - Look at the books , listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Give the answers . - Read the text in silent . - Read the text aloud . - Answer the questions . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class .. - Look at the picture and answer the question . - Answer the question. - Read the text . - Listen and write down .. - Read new words in chorus and individually . - Read the text in silent . - Read the text aloud . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class ..

(282) morning , and the other is walk- to – school day d) It’s 5 km from school to the beach . e) Wednesday is the WTS day . f) Members living near school often take part in the WTS day . - Ask Ss to copy down . 3. Consolidation:2’  Take a class survey : - Have Ss work in groups asking their classmates what sport they like most . - Call on some groups to practice in front of the class . - Ask Ss to write the number of students who like each sport best , then complete the table in the notebooks . - Ask Ss to answer the question : What sport is the most popular in the class ? 4.Homework :1’ - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Write what sports you like best . - Do exercise 1,2 in workbook . - Prepare part A3,5. - Copy down. - Work in groups . - Practice in front of the class . - Write the number of the students who like each sport best . - Answer the question .. - Write homework .. Date of prepared : 02/03/2014 Date of teaching : 03/03/2014 Period: : 74 REVIEW FOR THE TEST Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary :.

(283) Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I. Aims Help Ss to review some grammar points in the last units 9 to 11 II. Objectives By the end of the lesson, Ss will be able to remember some grammar points III. Language Contents  Vocabulary: ( review )  Grammar : VI. Techniques Pair work, Individual work V. Teaching aids Textbook, sub board VI. Procedures - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES 1. Warm up. Ss’ ACTIVITIES Answer the questions.

(284) _ Ask Ss some questions: Did you do your homework last night? Did your eat dinner at home on Wednesday? Did you go to school yesterday? Did you watch a video on the weekend? Did you play basketball yesterday? _ Check 2. Review _ simple present tense _ some adjectives and adverbs _ Review modal verbs: ought to, must, should, can, ... * Ask Ss do exercise: Circle the best answer 1. My mother always drives …… a. careful b. care c. carefully d. careless 2. You ought …. to the dentist. a. to go b. go c. going d. went 3. …….does your father like ? a. What’s sport b. What sport c. What sports d. What 4. I like swimming. ………………….. a. So do I b. Yes I do c. I do, too d. I like, too 5. He likes …………. sports. a. watch b. watching c. to watch d. watched 6. We don’t have television set …our place. a. at b. in c. to d. on 7. What kinds of ……. do you like ? -I like comic book a. films b. books c. programs d. movies 8. Are you free …….. Sunday ? a. at b. on c. in d.to 9. What would you like …… ? Pop music. a. to watching b. listening. _ Retell the tenses. _ Do exercise : individual work and share with a partner Key: 1. c 2. a 3. b 4. a 5. b 6. d 7. b 8. b 9. d 10.c.

(285) c. do d. to listen 10. How ………….. is Nga ? - She’s 40 kilos. a. high b. tall c. heavy d. weigh _ Call on some Ss give their answer _ Check and correct mistakes * Exercise 2: Write the sentences using the cue words. a. Minh/ like/ listen/ pop music. b. Most/ old/ people/ like/ watch/ TV. c. I/ prefer/ watch/ story films/ news. d. Lan/ not/ really/ like/ watch/ sports on TV. e. You/ must/ study/ harder/ please/ parents. f. Last month/ I/ ask/ him/ send/ me/ his story. g. He/ should/ go/ cinema.. _ Individual work _ Share with a partner Key: a. Minh likes listening to pop music. b. Most of old people like watching TV. c. I prefer watching story films to news. d. Lan does not really like watching sports on TV. e. You must study harder to please your parents. f. Last month, I asked him send me his story to the cinema.. g. He should go to the cinema.. _ Call on some Ss give their answer _ Check and correct answer * Exercise 3: Odd one out 1/ A. toothache B. flu C. headache D. doctor 2/ A. to swim B. care C. careful D. carefully 3. A. reader B. cartoon C. movies D. music show 4. A. banana B. spinach C. mangoes D. eat 5. A. good B. safely C. bad D. interesting. _ Group work Keys: 1. D 2. A 3. A 4. D 5. B. _ Check and correct mistakes 3.Summary _ Ask Ss to retell the knowledge they. Retell.

(286) have just reviewed 4.Homework Copy down _ Learn by heart vocab and grammar points from unit 9 to unit 11. _ Redo all the exercises. Date of prepared: 19/03/2014 Date of teaching: 20/03/2014 Period: 85(chay chuong trinh). UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 2 : A – Sports ( 3, 5 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar :.

(287) The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I. The aims : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to change from adjectives into adverbs .They will continue to talk about sports . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Skillful => Skillfully - Safe => safely - Cyclist - To cycle - To be aware of - Lifeguard - Strict - To obey 2.Grammar : Structure : Adjectivie + ly => adverb III. Technique : Explanation , eliciting , pair work . IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V. Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 1.Revision: 2’ S1:_ Which sports do you like? T has Ss ask and answer about sports they like S2:_ I like (playing) soccer..

(288) 2. Warm up: 7’ _ T gives some adjectives and adverbs _ T has Ss circle the Adjectives: Carefully well badly bad good careful slow => Introduce the lesson 3. Presentation: 15’ * Pre- teach vocab [E/ T] skillful (adj) => skillfully safe (adj) => safely (adv) slow (adj) => slowly (adv) good (adj) => well (adv) bad (adj) => badly (adv) interesting (adj) => interestingly (adv) Lifeguard (n) edge (n) sudden (n) strict (adj) _ T gives the picture and asks (?) Who is he? He is a good soccer player. (?) How does he play soccer? He plays well. _ Explain how to use adjectives and adverbs of manner Positions of adjectives: + After the verb “to be” + Before the noun Positions of adverbs: + After the odinary verbs to modify. *A3: _ Show the pictures and ask Ss to listen. _ T has Ss to practice with a partner. *A5: _ T asks Ss to read A5 and do the exercise * Complete the sentences: a/ My mother cycles ___ . she is a ___ cyclist. (slow/ slowly) b/ Ba’s sister swims ___. She is a ___ swimmer. (quick/ quickly) c/ Mr Hai drives ___. He is a ___ driver. (careful/. Do you like soccer? S1:_ Yes, I do. Take note Listen and repeat. Answer the questions: He is a soccer player He plays well. -Pairwork (practice with a partner) - Ind.work Answer keys: clearly carefully safely carelessly strictly Group work (5 groups) - Discuss and complete the sentences..

(289) carefully) d/ I am a ___ tennis player. I plays ___ (bad/ badly). e/ Nam and Ba play soccer __ . They are ___ soccer players (skillful/ skillfully). f/ Mr Nam is ___ truct driver. He drove ___ ,so he had an accident (careless/ carelessly). 4. Summary:2’ * Ss retell what they've just studied Retell 5:Homework: 1’ + Learn the adverbs listen and copy + Do the Exercise again (writing) Date of prepared: 19/03/2014 Date of teaching: 20/03/2014 Period: 86(chay chuong trinh). UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 2 : A – Sports ( 4,6 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:.

(290) + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I. The aims : After the lesson , Ss will be able to know how to change from adjectives into adverbs .They will continue to talk about sports . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : district, prize, competition, to organize, participant, to increase, ability, to take part in, to win, WWF, WTS 2.Grammar : Review The Simple Past tense III. Technique : Explanation , eliciting , pair work . IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V. Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES Sts’ACTIVITIES 1.Warm up:5’ - Listen to the teacher *Network swimming play football skipping walking. Tell the name of some activities Sport activiti es. ...............

(291) =>Introduce the lesson 2.Pre-reading: 10’ _ Read A4 and ask Ss to find the new words -Find the new words and take notes * Pre- teach vocab [E/ T] -Listen and repeat.  district (n)->Ex  prize (n)->Ex  competition (n)->Ex/T  to organize (v)->T  participant (n)->Ex/S  to increase (v)->T  ability (n)->T 3.While-reading: 20’ _ T has Ss read A4 carefully and answer with True/ False 1. The writer takes part in “WFF” 2. They organized that club to win the prize. 3. The member of the club walks to school everyday. 4. Walking is not a fun, easy activity. 5. Everybody can enjoy it. * Play game: lucky numbergroupwork _ T asks Ss to read the text carefully and answer comprehension questions(a-f). - Pairwork. 4. Post-reading: 7’ _ T and one S do the model _ T has Ss do the same (make a short dialogue). Free-practice Eg. S1:_ Do you like walking? S2:_ … S1:_ Which sports do you often do to keep healthy? S2:_ …. 5. Summary: 2. * Ss retell what they've just studied 6. Homework: 1’ + Learn the adverbs. groupwork Answers: a/ He takes part in walking. b/ The writer’s team won the first prize, they was so happy and wanted to keep the activity. c/ One activity is a 5 km walk to the beach on Sunday, and the other is walk-to-school day. d/ 5 km e/ Wednesday f/ Members living near school.. Retell Copydown.

(292) + Write the answer A4 in your exercise book. Date of prepared: 12/03/2015 Date of teaching: 13/03/2015 Period: 87. UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson4: B – Come and play ( B1,2 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books ….

(293) V. Procedure I. The aims : The students will continue to practice about the topic of sports and in modal verbs . The students will continue to practice in making , accepting and refusing an invitation , using modal verbs . II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Ought to - Paddles 2.Grammar : Making an invitation : Would you like to …………? => Yes , let’s / I’d like to / That’s a good idea . III. Technique : Eliciting , pair work , group work , Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V.Procedure : - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES Sts’ACTIVITIES 1. Warm up: 5’ _ T asks Ss some questions 1. Which sports do you like? 2. Would you like to play soccer? 3. Would you like to play table tennis? 4. What do you say when you refuse politely?. Free answer. 2. Presentation: 8’ Set the situation * Pre- teach vocab  ought to (Modal verb)  paddle (n)  spare (adj) _ Explain how to use modal verbs should -> ought to -> must -> have to 3. Practice: 20’. - Take notes - Listen and repeat. *B1. - Listen and read B1.

(294) _ Play the tape and ask Ss to listen. _ T has Ss read B1 and answer the questions _ Monitor to the Ss. - Answer the questions (Ind.work and pair work) - Answers: a. Nam must finish his homework before he plays table tennis. b. Nam 'll be ready in a few minutes. c. Ba will finish a question for Math. d. Ba has two paddles. - Practise (pairwork). _ Ask Ss to practice with a partner *B 2 _ Play the tape _ Read B2 (?) What did Ba say to ask Nam to play basketball with him? _ T has Ss change the underlined details using the information in the box. _ Monitor to the Ss 4. Production: 10’ _ Give Ss some pictures and have them make their own dialogues _ Remind the structure how to make and refuse an invitation.. Pairwork (Free-practice). 5. Summary: 1’ * Ss retell what they've just studied 6. Homework: 1’. Retell. + Learn the adverbs + Complete their own dialogue B2.. Copydown. Date of prepared: 15/03/2015 Date of teaching: 16/03/2015 Period: 88 UNIT 13 : ACTIVITIES Lesson 5 : B- Come and play ( B 3,4,5).

(295) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: By the end of the lesson , Ss will listen for details to complete the dialogue and practice asking and answering about the personal information . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : Review the vocabulary about health . Male - Female + Grammar : The simple present tense . Structure : How + adj + to be + S ? What + to be + N ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure I.. The aims : After the lesson , Ss will know about a new sport and they continue to practice with modal verbs . Practice reading skill. II. Language content : 1.Vocabulary : - Surface - Scuba diving - Underwater - To invent => invention - Pearl diver - Vessel - To explore - Special breathing equipment.

(296) - Human - Opportunity 2.Grammar : Review the modal verbs . III. Technique : Eliciting , using pictures , pair work , group work . IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , pictures , sub- board V. Procedure - Organization: checking attendance Checking up - New lesson: TEACHER’S ACTIVITIES Ss’ACTIVITIES 1.Warm up:5’ _ T asks Ss some questions Free answer (can answer in 1/ What is most of the world’s surface? Vietnamese) 2/ What do you know about the ocean? 3/ Have you ever stay underwater? 4/ Can you stay underwater for a long time? => Introduce the new lesson,using some picture 2. Presentation: 10’ B3 _ Read B3 and ask Ss to talk the new words * Pre- teach vocab (E/T)  surface (n)  pearl diver (n)  breathing equipment (n)  underwater ()  to invent (v) -> invention (n)  scuba-diving (n)  vessel (n)  to explore (v). Take note Listen and repeat. 4. Practice: 18’ -Listen and read B3 (Ind.work) - Answer T/F (groupwork) _ Read the B3 Keys: _ T has Ss read B3 silently and answer with a/ F -> Most of the world’s surface True/ False, if it’s false correct it is water. _ Monitor to the Ss b/ T.

(297) Correct the False sentences. c/ F -> Now scuba-diving is a popular sport because people can swim freely in the water with the help of special breathing equipments. d/ F -> Jacques Cousteau invented a deep-sea diving vessel. e/ T. B4 Review modal verbs: can, could, should, ough to, must _ T has Ss complete the passage with the modal verbs in the box. Groupwork 1/ can 2/ must 3/ mustn’t 4/ should 5/ can 6/ should/ ought to 7/ can/ should 8/ should/ must. 4. Production: 10’ B5 _ T has Ss complete the dialogue and practise with their partner a/ A: Can I watch TV now? B: No, you can’t. You ___ finish your dinner first. b/ A: ___ I go camping with my classmates this weekend? D: OK. You ___ go. But you ___ finish your homework after you came back on Sunday evening. 5. Summary:1’ * Ss retell what they've just studied 6. Homework: 1’ + Learn vocabulary. pairwork Using can/ must. Retell.

(298) + Review modal verbs Prepare Unit 14 part A1. Copydown. Period: 89 UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 1 : A – Time for TV ( A1 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: After the lesson , Ss will learn about a new topic , The activities in freetime such as watching TV , playing chess….. and know specific information about Lan and Hoa . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : - Series - Adventure - Cricket - To sound - to prefer - To guess + Grammar :.

(299) Review the invitation and accepting or refusing . Would you like to …………. => I’d love to / I’m sorry , I can’t ……. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. 1.. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Proceduce: T’s Activities Ss’ Activities 2. Warm up : 7’ - Answer the questions - Chatting with . Ss about their freetime by some questions : What do you usually do in your freetime ? - Look at the picture Do you like and listen . watching TV? Do you like watching news - Listen to the in English? teacher . What programs on TV do you like watching? What is your - Listen and write favorite down . program? How much time do you spend Read new words in chorus.

(300) watching TV a day ? ……………… …. - Remark and lead in new lesson . 3. Presentation :34’ - Ask Ss to look at the picture and introduce : This is the picture of Hoa’s family . Look at it and guess what they do in their freetime ? do they watch TV? - Introduce the situation : Watching TV is one of the most popular activities in freetime . We are going to listen to a dialogue between Lan and Hoa . What do Lan’s / Hoa’s family do in their freetime ? - Explain some new words to Ss . + Series ( n ) : + Adventure ( n ) + Cricket ( n ) + To prefer ( v ) = to like ……better …. and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down .. - Play a game . - Guess what Lan and Hoa do in the evening . - Give the predictions . - Look at the books , listen to the tape and check the predictions. - Give the answer : Hoa usually talks about her day, then she reads and sometimes she plays chess . Lan usually watches TV. - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice reading in front of the class . - Do exercise . - Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the answers .. - Write down. - Work in pairs . - Some pairs practice in front of the class ..

(301) + To sound ( v ) + To guess ( v ) = to predict - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Have them play a game : what and where . - Ask Ss to guess what Lan and Hoa usually do in the evening . - Call on some Ss to give their predictions . 4. Practice : - Ask Ss to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the answers .. - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue - Call on 3 or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . - Ask Ss to read the dialogue again then choose the best answers ..

(302) a) b) c). d) e). - Have Ss exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the key : Lan invites Hoa to eat dinner with her family . Lan wants Hoa to watch TV before dinner . Hoa’s family doesn’t have a TV because her aunt and uncle don’t like watching TV. Hoa likes spending time with her aunt and uncle at night . Lan’s family always watches TV in the evening - Ask Ss to write in the notebooks .. 5. Production :2’ - Have Ss work in pairs asking and answering about themselves . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . 5.Homework : 1’ - Learn by heart.

(303) new words by - Write homework writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 1 at page 87 in workbook . Prepare part A2 .. Period: 90. UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 2 : A – Time for TV ( A2 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: The students practice the dialogue in order to review the structure “ Would you like to ………?” question and answer to talk about their favorite TV program . 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary : - Detective movie - Pop concert - Classical concert - Cowboy movie - Drama - Advertisement Grammar :.

(304) Review : would you like to + V. ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate: - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure Contents,times. T’s Activities. 1.Warm up : 2.Presentation : - Introduce the - Teacher reads in situation of the Vietnamese , Ss lesson . slap in English. - Ask Ss to look at - State the group the books and listen which wins the to the tape . game . - Explain some new - Remark and lead in words : new lesson . + Cowboy movie ( n ) + Detective movie ( n ) + Pop concert ( n ) + Classical concert (n) + Drama ( n ) + Advertisement ( n ) - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation .. Ss’Activities. Clap the hands . - Listen . - Look at the books and listen to the tape . - Listen and write down . Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down ..

(305) - Have Ss work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Explain the model sentences : What would you like to watch / see? I’d like to watch / see a cowboy movie . 3.Practice : - Ask Ss to look at the advertisements , make up similar dialogues . - Have Ss work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes if necessary .. - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice reading in front of the class . - Listen carefully .. - Look at the advertisements and make up similar dialogues . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class. S1: Would you like to go to the concert this week ? S2: That sounds good . What would you like to see? S1: There is a classical concert on at Hanoi opera House. S2: Ok. Can you make it on Tuesday night ? S1: Sorry , I have to go to E club . S2: ……… - Look at the mapped dialogue .. 4.Further practice : - Give a mapped dialogue : Hoa ………………….Lan Would ……theater? ….good . What would you ………..?. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class ..

(306) ….easy life ……. youth theater . …….Tuesday night? Sorry ….E club . How….Thursday? . Fine, let’s ………. - Write homework . Ok Ok. - Have Ss work in pairs using mapped dialogue . - Call on some pairs to role play in front of the class . - Correct the mistake. 6. Homework : - Learn by heart new words . - Make a dialogue in the notebook . - Prepare part A3,4 ..

(307) Period: 91 UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 3 : A – Time for TV ( A 3,4) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: After the lesson , students will be able to understand about TV in Viet Nam thirty years ago and today . 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary : - Owner - To change - To gather - Might Grammar : Review the simple present tense and past simple tense .. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities : - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ?.

(308) + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure Contents, times 1. Warm up : 3 words : Watch – television – living room - Have Ss guess the words . - Remark and lead in new lesson . 2. New activities : A. Read : TV in Viet Nam + Owner ( n ) : the person who has TV . + To gather ( v ) : + To change ( v ) : + Might ( modal verb ) : What and where True or False prediction. 1) Thirty years ago in Viet Nam , a lot of people had TV sets . 2) These TV owners were very popular . 3) The neighbors gathered to watch color programs in the evening . 4) Now , they don’t spend much time together . 5) A few people have TV sets today . Answer key : 1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5.F 1) No, very few people .. T’s Activities. Ss’ Activities. - Have Ss play a game : Hangman. - Play a game .. - Ask Ss to look at the pictures and say about them .. All class take part in the game .. - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some new words to Ss . - Have Ss read new words in chorus and individually . - Correct their pronunciation . - Have Ss play a game : what and where . True or False prediction.. - Look at the pictures and say about them . - Listen and write . - Read new words in chorus and individually . - Play a game .. - Ask Ss to do an exercise : - Have Ss do exercise in groups . - Call on some groups to give their predictions . - Ask the rest groups to exchange the results . - Have Ss look at the book , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some Ss to give the answers . - Correct and give the answer key : 1. F 2. T 3. F 4. T 5.F - Call on some Ss to read the. - Work in groups . - Give the predictions . - Exchange the result. - Give the answers . - Some students read the passage aloud . - Read the passage again and.

(309) 2) The black and white programs . 3) They might sleep a little . 4) No, none . 5) In their own living room .. 1. people 2. not 3. TV 4. popular 5. evening 6. gather 7. they 8. today 9. have 10. life 11. know 3. Consolidation : - Have students work in groups discussing the advantages and disadvantages of TV . - Call on some groups to present their ideas . - Correct if necessary . 4. Homework : - Learn by heart new words by making 2 sentences with them . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 89 in workbook . - Prepare part B1,2 .. passage aloud . - Give some answers and ask students to find out the questions . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and ask students to write down . * Now complete the summary : - Ask students to read the passage again then find the words to complete the summary . - Have students exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the answer key : - Call on some students to read the summary aloud . B. Play with words . - Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question : what is she doing ? - Play the tape for students . - Ask students to look at the books and read after the tape . - Call on some students to read aloud . - Correct their pronunciation .. find the questions for the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Read the passage again and complete the summary . - Exchange the result with the partner . - Give the answer in front of the class .. - Read the summary aloud . - Look at the picture and answer the question . - Listen to the tape . - Look at the book and read after the tape . - Read aloud . - Work in groups . - Give the ideas in front of the class . - Write homework ..

(310) Period: 92 UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN Lesson 4 : B – What’s on ? ( B1,2 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: The students continue to practice the topic about TV , they talk about their favorite programs and the time of some programs on TV . 1. Knowledge: Vocabulary : - Sports show - Children’s program - Early news - Weather forecast - The world today - A first full of dollars’ Grammar : What kinds of programs do you like ?. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :.

(311) - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure Contents, times 1. Warm up :7 mins - Have students play a game : Jumbled words . + RGMAPOR + NEATERGE + SUMIC + VOMEI + REHATTE + ODARI 2. New activities : 34 mins A. Listen . Then practice with a partner . What’s on TV ? * Now answer : a. No’ she doesn’t because there aren’t many good programs for teenagers . b. Ba likes to watch sports shows, cartoons and movies . c. Nga likes to watch programs about teenagers in other countries . d. Because they don’t play the kind of music she likes . e. She is going to listen to the radio and maybe read a book .. T’s Activities - Call on 2 students to go to the board and write down . - Remark and give marks .. - Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question: What’s on TV ? - Introduce the situation of the dialogue , then ask students to guess what kinds of programs Nga/ Ba likes. - Call on some students to give their predictions . - Have students look at the book and listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Call on 3or 4 pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class .. Ss’ Activities - Play a game . + Program + Teenager + Music + Movie + Theater + Radio - Go to the board and write .. - Look at the picture and answer the question . - Listen and guess . - Give the prediction . - Look at the book , listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class ..

(312) B. Listen . write the times of he programs . . Children’s programs : 5:00 b. Early News : 6:00 . Weather forecast : 6:10 d. The world Today : 6: 15 . Movie : “ A fistful of dollars” : 7:00. 3. Consolidation : Give some cues then ask tudents to practice asking and nswering : + Morning News + Teenagers. + The world of animals . + Music programs . Have students work in pairs . Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . Correct the mistakes .. - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask students to read the dialogue again to find out the answers for the questions . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct and give the correct answers : - Ask students to write in the notebooks . - Have students look at 5 programs in part 2 . - Ask them to predict the times of these programs .. - Call on some students to give their predictions . - Ask them to listen to the tape and check their prediction. - Play the tape again for students . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Have students listen to the tape 4. Homework : again and check the answers . Learn by heart new words . - Correct and give the answer Do exercise 1,2 at page 90 in key : workbook . - Have students write the Prepare part 3,4,5 . answers in the notebooks .. - Read the dialogue again to find the answers . - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class.. - Write in the notebook . - Look at the programs in the book . - Predict the time of the programs . - Give the prediction in front of the class . - Listen to the tape . - Give the answers. - Listen to the tape and check the answers . - Write in the notebooks . - Write . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write homework ..

(313) Period:. 93. UNIT 14 : FREETIME FUN B- What’s on ? ( B3,4 ) Date of prepared: 22/ 02/2017 Date of teaching : 23/ 02/2017 Organization : ....................................../............... students. Absent’ students: I. Objectives: After the lesson , the students will understand about popular TV programs . They will continue to know some more vocabulary about TV programs . 1. Knowledge: + Vocabulary : - Audience - To contest - Artist - Contestant - To perform - Folk music - Imports - To include - Satellite - Cable TV + Grammar : Review : the simple present tense .. 2. Skills :Reading and speaking 3. Attitudes: Love this subject, like to study English. 4. Building and developing Ss’ qualities and abilities :.

(314) - Self study, solution, creative, commucation, co – operate and use the foreign language. - Honest, helpful and have the respondsibility with themselve.. II- Questions:. + Do you enjoy going on a picnic ? + Where do you often go on summer vacations ? + What do you usually do during the vacation ? + Have you ever been to Nha Trang ? + What do you think about Nha Trang ?. III- Method of estimate:. - During the lesson by asking the Ss somes questions - After the lesson by giving somes tests and asking ss to do. - Give mark or comments IV - Teaching aids: Textbook , Pictures about places of interests books … V. Procedure Contents,times 1. Warm up : 7 mins - Checking up the old lesson 2. New activities : 40 mins A. Listen and read . Then answer the questions . new words : + Audience : Người xem, khán giả The person who watches the shows . + Artist ( n ) : ca sĩ A famous singer . + To perform ( v ) : tiến hành + To contest ( v ) = kiểm tra To compete + Contestant ( n ) = cuộc thi Competitor + Folk music ( n ) : nhạc dân ca + Imports ( n ) = foreign series . + To include ( v ) : bao gồm A.T or F prediction : 1. Pop music , contests , imports are popular TV programs .. T’s Activities - Ask students to look at the three pictures and identify them . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then explain some - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Check new words by playing a game called rub out and remember . - Have students do an exercise : T or F prediction . - Have students work in groups in 2 minutes . - Call on some groups to give their predictions . - Ask students to look at the books , listen to the tape and check their predictions . - Call on some students to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. T. Ss’ Activities. All class take part in the game .. - Play game in 2 groups .. - Look at three pictures and identify them . - Listen and write .. Read new words in chorus and individually , guess the meanings , then copy down ..

(315) 2. Teenagers like to listen to classical music . 3. There are contests of knowledge . 4. The contestants are students , workers , TV viewers . 5. Imports are very expensive Answers: a. Teenagers like to hear the latest pop music and see the shows of their favorite artists . b. They are students , workers or family members . c. Imports usually include police and hospitals . d. Students’ answer. B. Write. Complete the passage . Use the words in the box . 1. Around 2. Watch 3. Listen 4. Series 5. Show 6. Like 7. Station 8. Receive 9. Cities 10 . Possible 3. Consolidation : 1 minute - Have students take a survey :. 5. F - Have students read the passage aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . - Ask students to work in pairs asking and answering the questions in the books . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes and give the correct answers .. - Play a game . _ Do an exercise .. - Work in groups . - give the prediction . Listen to the tape and check . - Give the answers in front of the class - Read the passage aloud .. - Ask students to look at the words in the box and read them aloud . - Explain some new words to students .. - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Read the words in the box .. + To be possible : the same meaning with Can. + Satellite ( n ) : + Cable TV ( n ) :. - Have students complete the passage , using the words in Ex: S1: Do you want to hear the box . pop music ? - Ask students to exchange the S2: Yes, I do./ No, I don’t results with the partners . . - Call on some students to give Or : S1: What TV programs the results in front of the class . do you want to see? - Correct and give the answer S2: I want to see the key : contests . - Ask 2 students to read the _ Have students work in passage aloud . groups . ( Each group has a secretary ) 4. Homework : 1 minute - Learn by heart new words. - Listen and write .. - Complete the passage . - Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the results in front of the class . - Read the completed passage aloud . - Take a survey . - Listen ..

(316) by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 3,4 at page 91 in workbook . - Review for doing a test in the next lesson .. - Work in groups . - Write homework .. Date of prepared: 07/4/2016 Date of teaching: 08/4/2016 Period: 94. Review I. Objectives: In this lesson, students continue to practice the passive form, reported speech with if/ whether, question words before to- inf. Do some exercises. 1, Knowledge: A, Vocabulary: - Review the words they have learnt. B, Grammar: - Passive form. - Indirect questions with if and whether. - Question words before to- inf - Verb + to - inf 2, Skills: Practice four skills. 3, Attitude: Students work hard..

(317) II. Teaching methods: work in pairs, work in groups, discuss, III. Teaching aids: book, pictures, cassette, tape ……. IV. Procedure: Teacher's activities 1, Warm up: + Who's absent today? + What's the date? + How are you? * Check the old lesson: 2, Presentation: - Give students some exercises and ask them to do. Exercise 1: Put the correct form of the verbs in the brackets. 1. Most of the Earth's surface (cover)..... by water. 2. There's someone behind us. I think we (follow)............. 3. An interesting book (read).... by Lan at the moment. 4. This bike (use).... for more than six years. 5. Nowadays, many historical places (destroy).... Seriously. 6. A new textbook (publish).... next month. 7. Since the 1980s more and more paper (recycle).... ... 8. Tet holiday in Viet Nam (celebrate).... around January and February. Answer key 1. is covered 2. are being followed 3. is being read 4. has been used 5. are being destroyed 6. will be published 7. has been recycled 8. is celebrated. Students' activities - The monitor answers.. - Students write down.. - Students do in 8 minutes.. - Some students give their answers.. - Students do in 6 minutes.. - Some students read their answers..

(318) Exercise 2: Turn the following sentences into passive form. 1. They made the fire in the traditional way. 2. You must collect four bottles of water. 3. How do people cook this kind of food? 4. The children are redecorating the sittingroom. 5. You should open the wine about an hour before you use it. 6. They have just given the children some gifts. 1. The fire was made in the traditional way. 2. Four bottles of water must be collected (by you). 3. How is this kind of food cooked? 4. The sitting- room is being redecorated by the children. 5. The wine should be opened an hour before it is used. 6. The children have just been given the gifts./ The gifts have just been given to the children.. Execise 3: Turn the following sentences into reported speech. 1. "Are you from Australia?", I said to the tourist. 2. "Send me a postcard when you arrive in Paris!", I said to Lan. 3. "What are you doing?", Lan asked to me. 4. "Why do you think it is safe?", he asked her. 5. "Can you take photograph?", he wanted to know. 1. I asked the tourist if/ whether he was from Australia. 2. I asked Lan to send me a postcard when she arrived in Paris. 3. Lan asked me what I was doing.. - Students do in 5 minutes.. - Some students give their answers.. - Students repeat.. - Write down..

(319) 4. He asked her why she thought it was safe. 5. He wanted to know if/ whether I could take photograph. 3, Remember: + Who can repeat the main contents of the lesson? 4, Homework: - Write on the board. - Do again these exercises. - Prepare "Written test - 45' ".. Date of prepared: 14/ 4/2016 Date of teaching: 15/ 4/2016 Period: 97 UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 2 : A- Video games ( A 1 ) I. Aims : After the lesson , the students will be able to give the advice and respond for not doing something such as : playing video games . They will talk about video games and disadvantages of playing video games . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Video games - Arcade - Amusement center - Addictive - Inventor - Social skill - Dizzy - Premises - To develop - Robbery.

(320) - To identify. - Industry. 2. Grammar : Structure : Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade . No, I won’t . III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , sub- board . V. Procedure : T’s Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Have Ss play a game : Networks . Entertainment s. - Have Ss play game in 2 groups . - Remark and lead in new lesson . 2. New activities : - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask Ss to look at the picture and answer the question : What can you see in the picture ? - Introduce some new words : + Amusement center ( n ) : A place where we can go to play some games for relaxing . + Video games ( n ) : + Arcade ( n ) : + Addictive ( adj ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students play a game : what and where . - Have students look at the dialogue and listen to the tape . - Ask students to read after the tape . - Have students work in pairs reading the dialogue. - Call on 3 or 4 pairs to practice reading in front of. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game . 2 groups take part in the game . Discuss in groups , then Ss go to the board and write down .. - Listen and answer the question . - Listen and write .. - Read new words . - Play a game . - Look at the book and listen to the tape . - Read after the tape . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class ..

(321) the class . - Correct their pronunciation . - Introduce the new model sentence : + Don’t spend too much of your time in the arcade. => No, I won’t . ( Advise somebody not to do something .) - Ask students to make examples as model . - Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions in the book . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice asking and answering in front of the class . - Have some students go to the board and write the correct answers . - Ask students to write the answers in the notebooks . a. He’s going to the amusement center . b. He’s going to play video games . c. He goes to the amusement center about once a week . d. No, he doesn’t . e. He usually stays for about an hour . f. Because video games can be addictive . g. He will do his homework later . 3. Consolidation : - Give a mapped dialogue and ask students to look at carefully . YOU YOUR FRIEND Where ….going ? Amusement center What …….do? How often ?. - Listen .. - Make examples as model . - Find the answers for the questions - Work in pairs . - Practice asking and answering in front of the class . - go to the board and write the answers . - Write in the notebooks .. - Look at the mapped dialogue .. video games 2/ week. Don’t spend …. video games … Don’t forget …… homework . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on 2 or 3 pairs to practice in front the class . - Correct the mistake if necessary . 4. Homework :. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write homework ..

(322) - Learn by heart new words and structure by making 2 sentences with each . - Do exercise 1, 2 in workbook . - Prepare part A2,3 .. Date of prepared: 08/4/2015 Date of teaching: 09/4/2015 Period: 98 UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 2 : A- Video games ( A 2, 3 ) I. Aims : By the end of the lesson , students will be able to understand video games and some disadvantages of playing video games . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Inventor - Social skill - Dizzy - Premises - To develop - Robbery - To identify - Industry 2. Grammar : - Modal verbs . - The present simple tense ..

(323) III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork . IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V. Procedure : T’s Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Ask students some questions such as : + Do you like playing video games ? + How often do you play video games ? + How long do you usually spend playing video games? + What do you think about playing video games ? ……………… - Remark and lead in new lesson . 2. New activities : A. Listen and read . - Introduce the situation of the lesson , then ask students to do an exercise : True or False prediction . 1. Children like playing video games because they are good fun . 2. It’ s very good for children to spend too much time on their own . 3. Playing video games for a long time will make the children become tired . 4. Children mustn’t play outdoors with their friends . 5. Some inventors become rich when they are very young . - Have students work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their prediction. - Ask students to look at the books and listen to the tape then check their prediction . - Call on some students to give the answers . - Correct and give the correct answers : 1. T 2. F 3. T 4. F 5. T - Have students listen to the tape again and introduce some new words : + Inventor ( n ) The person who invents videogames . + Dizzy ( adj ) : + To develop ( v ) : + Social skill ( n ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Answer T’s questions .. - Listen and do exercise .. - Work in groups . - Give the prediction . - Listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Give the answers . - Listen to the tape again .. - Read new words in chorus and individually ..

(324) individually . - Ask students to read the text in silent . - call on 3or 4 students to read the text aloud . - Correct their pronunciation . * Now answer , complete the sentences . - Have students read the text again to find out the answers . - Have students exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Correct the mistake and give the correct answers . a) Many young people play video games . b) Some inventors of video games become very rich . c) The doctor thinks all children should take part in outdoor activities with their friends . d) The doctor says you should spend little time playing video games . - Have students write in the notebooks . B. Complete the passage with the words in the box . - Explain the request of the exercise then introduce some new words . + To identify ( v ) : + Premises ( n ) : + Robbery ( n ) => robber ( n ) + Industry ( n ) : - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students complete the passage . - Ask them to exchange the results with the partners . - Call on some Ss to give the answer in front of the class - Correct and give the key : 1. be 2. have 3. is 4. identify 5. are 6. use 7. can 8. will 9. buy 10. show - Call on 2 students to read the completed passage aloud - Ask students to write down . 3. Consolidation : - Have students work in groups discussing about the disadvantages of playing video games . - Call on some groups to demonstrate their ideas in front of the class . - Remark . 4. Homework :. - Read the passage in silent . - Read aloud . - Read the passage again to find the answers . - Exchange the results with the partners . - Give the answers .. - Write down . - Listen and write .. - Read new words in chorus and individually . - Complete the passage . - Exchange the results . - Give the answers .. - Read aloud . - Write . - Work in groups . - Demonstrate the ideas . - Write homework ..

(325) - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each . - Do exercise 3,4 in workbook . - Prepare the next lesson .. Date of prepared: 09/4/2015 Date of teaching: 10/4/2015 Period: 99 UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 4 : B – In the city ( B1,2 ) I.Aims : After the lesson students will be able to know about life in the city and life in the country . Practice 4 skills : listening , reading , speaking and writing . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - The rest - To scare - To hate - Awake - Get used to - Direction 2. Grammar : Review : the simple present tense and past tense . III. Technique : Brainstorming , Asking and answering , pairwork , groupwork ..

(326) IV. Teaching aids : Textbook , tape , cassette , Pictures about the city and the country . V. Procedure : T’s Activities 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Have students play a game : Wordsquare . H R O B H G I E N O C L U B Z W S C O Z K S J V Q I E D R S Y M N T O G M Z J R K Y T N A O P C O Q Z E J L T T R A F F I C L O X L D R N U B I R B I K E S Q K V. Ss’ Activities - Greetings . - Play a game .. Discuss in groups to find the words which relate to the city and the country .. - Work in groups . - Ask students to find the words which relate to the city and country . - Have students work in groups . -Remark and lead in new lesson . 2. New activities : - Ask students to look at the picture and answer the question : What is the picture about ? - Ask students some questions such as : + Do you like to live in the city or in the country ? Why / why not ? - Introduce the situation of the lesson . - Ask students to look at the book and listen to the tape , then answer the question : Lan and Hoa , who likes to live in the city or in the country . - Play the tape for students . - Have students give the answers . - Introduce some new words to students : + The rest ( n ) : + Awake ( adj ) : + To scare ( v ) : + To hate ( v ) = to dislike + To get used to + N . + Direction ( n ) :. - Look at the picture and answer the question . - Answer T’s questions . - Listen . - Look at the book and listen to the tape then answer the questions . - Give the answers . - Listen and write .. - Read new words in chorus and individually ..

(327) - Have students read new words in chorus and individually . - Have students play a game : rub out and remember . - Have students discuss about life in the city and life in the country . * Brainstorming : Life in the city Life in the country Crowded Little traffic ………… ………….. - Have students work in groups . - Call on some groups to give their ideas . - Have students read the dialogue in pairs . - Call on some pairs to read the dialogue in front of the class . - Correct the pronunciation . - Ask students to read the dialogue again and find the answers for the questions . - Have students play a game : Lucky numbers 1. Where did Hoa live before ? 2. Why doesn’t Hoa like the city ? 3. LN . 4. What does Hoa do in the evening ? 5. What does Hoa dislike most in the city ? Why ? 6. Does She like the city ? 7. LN 8 . Why did Hoa like living in a village in Hue? - Remark and ask students to write the answers in the notebooks . 3. Consolidation : - Ask students to use the questions in part B2 to work in pairs discussing about life in the city and life in the country . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Correct and remark. 4. Homework : - Learn by heart new words by writing 3 lines for each - Write the answers in part B2 in the exercise books . - Prepare part B3,4 .. - Play a game . - Discuss about life in the city and life in the country .. - Work in groups . - Give the ideas . - Work in pairs reading the dialogue . - Practice reading the dialogue in front of the class . - Find the answers . - Play a game in 2 groups .. - Write the answers in the notebooks . - Discuss about life in the city and in the country . - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write homework ..

(328) Date of prepared: 11/4/2014 Date of teaching: 12/4/2014 Period: 100 UNIT 15 : GOING OUT Lesson 4 : B – In the city ( B 3 ) I. Aims : After the lesson students will know how Hoa got used to the life in the city and what she could do . They practice reading and listening skills . II. Language content : 1. Vocabulary : - Rarely - To socialize 2. Grammar : - Review : The simple present tense and past simple tense . - Like / Prefer + to infinitive ; Like + gerund III. Technique : Eliciting , pairwork , groupwork , using pictures . IV. Teaching aids :.

(329) Textbook , tape , cassette , pictures . V. Procedure : T’s Activities. Ss’ Activities. 1. Warm up : - Greetings . - Have students play a game : Networks City. - Greetings . - Play a game .. Country. - Have students work in groups . - Have students go to the board and write . - Remark . 2. New activities : A. Read . - Introduce the content of the text : The text tells how Hoa got used to the city life . - Ask students to read the text and find out what she could do . - Have students read the text in silent . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Call on some students to read the text aloud . - Correct the pronunciation . - Introduce new words : + Rarely ( adv ) : + To socialize ( v ) : + Structure : Like / prefer + to infinitive Ex: Hoa likes to read / She prefers to socialize with her friends . Like / prefer + gerund . Ex: Hoa like playing chess very much . - Ask students to make sentences as model . - Give some more questions and ask students to answer : a) What did Hoa and her friends often do together ? b) Why did Hoa rarely go to see movies or eat out in the evening ? c) Why couldn’t Hoa read many books in her village ? d) Why did Hoa decide that the city wasn’t so bad after all ?. - Work in groups . - Go to the board and write .. - Listen . - Read the text and find out what she could do . - Read in silent . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Read the text aloud . - Listen and write .. - Make sentences . - Answer the questions ..

(330) - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to ask and answer in front of the class . - Correct the mistakes . - Ask students to read the text again then make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening , using the simple present tense . - Have students exchange the results with their partners . - Call on some students to give their answers in front of the class . - Call one student to go to the board and write down . - Correct and ask students to write in the notebooks . B. Listen . Match each name to an activity . - Introduce the aim of the listening . - Ask students to look at the pictures and give the activity of each picture . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Have students guess and write the names next to the pictures . - Ask students to listen to the tape and check their prediction . - Play the tape for students . - Call on some students to give the answers in front of the class . - Play the tape again for students to check the answers - Correct and give the key : Ba- b Hoa- a Nga – d Nam – c Lan – f An – e 3. Consolidation : - Ask students to use the model in part B3 and the pictures in B4 to talk about what they like to do or dis like to do . - Have students work in pairs . - Call on some pairs to practice in front of the class . - Remark . 4. Homework : - Write the things that you often do in the evening . - Do exercises in part B in workbook . - Prepare unit 15 –B4,5.. - Work in pairs . - Ask and answer in front of the class . - Make a list of the things Hoa does in the evening . - Exchange the results . - Give the answers in front of the class . - Go to the board and write . - Write in the notebooks . - Listen to the teacher . - Give the activity of each picture . - Guess and write the names next to the pictures . - Listen to the tape and check the prediction . - Listen. - Give the answers in front of the class . - Check the answers .. - Work in pairs . - Practice in front of the class . - Write homework ..

(331) Week 33 Date: April, 27 , 2011 Period : 94. Date of prepared: 09/4/2014 Date of teaching: 10/4/2014 Period: 99 Unit 15. GOING OUT Lesson 5 : B – In the city ( B 4,5 ) I.Objectives: After the lesson sts will be able to listen for details. Read and answer comp qs and write transformation. II.Language contents: - Grammar: - Vocab.:. The life in the country / big city. III.Teaching aids: Textbook ; a poster IV.Procedure 1. Organization: 2. Check: 3. New lesson: T’ activities A.Warm up * Chatting a- Do you like the life in the big city ? Why (not) ? the country ? B4 P152. Ss’ activities T – WC.

(332) B.Pre - reading - T sets the scene / introduces the situations. Listen - Ask sts to look at pictures on P152 and answer the qs: - How many pictures / names are there ? - Yesterday Ba, Hoa, Nga, Nam, Lan and An did some activities. Before listening it. Now predict which activity each student did by the way writing their names next to the letter a, b, c .... Listen and predict - T models ...  sts predict - T collects sts' predictions on the bb. C.While listening : -Asks Sts to listen to the tape and correct their predictions - T checks with WC /  then compare each other. Tape transcript Yesterday evening Ba played table tennis. Nga saw movie, Lan went to a restaurant. Hoa played chess. Nam listened to COs and An watched a soccer match. Listen individually, then compare with the parners. - Sts correct their predictions  compare with each other. - T checks with WC. Post- listening: Write it up Ask Ss to write what they did in the pictures eg : a. Yesterday evening. Nga saw movie,. Hoa played chess b Yesterday evening Ba played table tennis 4.Consolidation: - Retells the contents of the text *Home work Wrie what did you do yesterday evening o excercise in the work book. Write individually.

(333) Week 33 Date: April, 28 , 2011 Period : 95. ANSWER KEY I.Mỗi câu trả lời đúng được 0,25 điểm 1. medical 2.weight 3.most 4.water 5.French 6.on.

(334) 7.cartoons 8.Thanks, I’d love to II.Mỗi câu trả lời đúng được 0,5 điểm 1.finish 2. to play 3.watched 4. Did / do III.Mỗi câu trả lời đúng được 0,5 điểm 1. parents 2.Present 3.studying IV.Mỗi câu trả lời đúng được 0,5 điểm 1. so 2,either 3.neither. 4.go 4.too. V.Mỗi câu trả lời đúng được 0,5 điểm 1. well 2. hard 3. skillfully 4. quickly 5. carefully 6. usually 7. cheerfully 8. happily. Week 33 Date: April, 29 , 2011 Period : 96. Unit 16. People and places A -Famous places in Asia (1,2) I.Objectives: By the end of the lesson sts will be able to read and talk about famocus places. II.Language contents:.

(335) - Grammar: Present simple tense with frequency adv. - Vocab.:. Famous place in Aisa. III. Teaching aids: IV.Procedure. Textbook ; a poster. 1.Organization: 2.Check: 3.New lesson:. A. Warm up. T’s activities Brainstorming. Ss’ activities adv of frequency. usually. group work. B.Pre – listening. Pre - teach vocab. - a pilot. : phi c«ng. (exp.). - as well as : còng nh - region. (trans.). : miÒn. Listen and guess Listen & repeat Read Copy. (exp.). - ocasiconally: đôi khi (syn = sometimes) - (to) fly. : bay. (mime). - an album : quyÓn sæ ¶nh. (realia). C.While - listening - Ask sts to read the dialogue in open pair  closed pair then draw out the sentences in the present simple with adverbs of frequency. (4 sentences) Eg. He usually flies to Hong Kong .... Read in pairs (individually). - Ask sts to read the text again (second time) and do matching P155 *Answer key:. a-D b-F. c-B d-C. e-A f-E. D.Post listening : - A2 . P155 - T runs through all the table P155 and gives instruction of completing the table  T models .... Listen Repeat.

(336) -Asks Sts to complete the table P155 - T checks with WC. Pair work. - T gives instruction of talking about famous places - Calls on a strong student do as an example. Eg exchange T1 : S:. Where does Ba's uncle usually fly to ? He usually flies to Bangkok.. T:. Where is Bangkok / that ?. S:. It's in Thai Land.. - Write down. 4.Consolidation: - Retells the contents of the dialogue *Homework - Read + translate A1 . P154. - Do B2 . P115.

(337) Week 34 Date: May, 4 , 2011 Period : 97. Unit 16. People and places A -Famous places in Asia (3,4) I.Objectives: After the lesson sts will be able to listen and read A3 + A4. P156 157: Write the Pilot's schedule; Answer comp questions. Do the matching and transformation writing II.Language contents: - Grammar :. Modal. - Vocabulary:. People and places. III. Teaching aids: IV.Procedure. "May". Textbook ; a poster. 1.Organization: 2.Check: write new words 3.New lesson: T’s activities I, Warm up ; China - beifing. Ss’ activities Group work. Thai Lan - Bangkok Malaysia - Kuala Lumpur Lao - Vientiane Myanmar - Yangon Indonesia - Jakata. B.Pre – listening: - T sets the scene  gives instructions of listening A3. P156. C.While - listening : -Asks Sts to listen to the tape three time and complete the pilot's schedule with the correct place. Listen.

(338) Tape transcript On Monday, I flew to Bangkok and then to Singapore. I Listen to the tape - Compare stayed Monday and Tuesday nights in a hotel. Then on - give answers Wednesday, I flew to Jakata. I stayed overnight and on Thursday I flew to Bali. I stayed there Thursday and Friday. On Friday night, I went to a cultural show and saw some Balinese dancers. On Saturday, I flew to Hong Kong. I was there over night. On Sunday, finally I flew back to Hanoi. - Calls Ss to give answers - Gives correct answers Answer Key: Monday. : Bangkok and Singapore. Tuesday. : Sinapore. Wednesday : Jakarta Thursday. : Bali. một hòn đảo nhỏ nổi tiếng. Friday. : Bali. cña Indonesia. Saturday. : Hongkong. Sunday. : back to Hanoi. A4 . P156 D.Pre - reading : Pre - teach vocab. an attraction. : sù thu hót, hÊp dÉn. (trans.). an ancient momument : tợng đài cổ. (visua. traditions (Ns). : tËp tôc, truyÒn thèng. (trans.). shadow puppet. : Móa rèi bãng ®en. a resort. : khu an dìng. coral (Ns). : san h«. (visual / realia). (to) sail. : l¸i tµu. (trans.). (to) mention. : nãi tíi. (trans.). Listen and guess Listen & repeat Read Copy. (exp.) (trans.). E.While – reading: - Asks Sts to read the text again (individually) and find out comp - qs. individually.

(339) *Answer Key: a. They're ancient momument (resorts).. / shows / attractions of the sea Pair work. b. Free answer. F.Post - reading : - Calls Ss to read the text 4.Consolidation: -Asks sts to read "Remember P.157. -Listen and remember. - Explains part remember * Questions and answer. a. What kinds of attractions do you prefer ? * Make meaningful sentences - You may prefer .... - write down. - The attractions range from ......... to ............ *Homework : - Read + translate A4 . P156 + Do transformation writing of A4 P156. - Do excercises in the workbook ********************************************************************.

(340) Week 34 Date: May, 5 , 2011 Period : 98. Unit 16: People and places Lesson: B 1- 2 I.Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Ss will get more knowledge about Vo Nguyen Giap and historic place. II.Language contents: - Grammar : - Vocabulary: III. Teaching aids:. Textbook ; a poster.

(341) IV.Procedure 1.Organization: 2.Check: write new words 3.New lesson: T’s activities. Ss’ activities. A.Pre-listening - Pre- teach a quiz. ( Visual) : Câu đố. a battle (expl). : ChiÕn dÞch. Listen and guess. The General (expl). : VÞ tíng. Listen & repeat. (to) lead (tran). : Lãnh đạo. Read. ( to) defeat (anton). : đánh bại. Copy. force (trans). : b¾t buéc. (to) be famous for. : næi tiÕng vÒ..... - T/ F prediction. Individual. B 1 – P 158 B. While – listening - Ask Ss to listen and check their preditions. -work in groups. - Ask Ss to compare with the partners. - Compare. - gives correct answers. - give answers. Key : a. F. b. F. c. T. d. f. e.T. f. f. - write down. -Ask Ss to listen and fill in the form ( With answer keys Name :. Vo Nguyen Giap. Years of birth:. 1911. Job :. General / Commander In Chief. Famous for :. Leading the people’s Army of. Vietnam The battle. :. D ien Bien Phu. Individual.

(342) C. post- listening:B 2- P 158 - Asks Ss to complete the dialogue. - Complete it in pair. - Gives correct answers. - Give answers. Key : 1: like. 2 : prefer. 3 : guess. 4 : favorite *Words cue drill a. Hong Nhung / Thanh Lam b. My Linh / My Tam c. Bang kieu / quang linh Example exchangce. - pair work. S1 : Doyou like Hong Nhung ? S2 : I prefer Thanh Lam S1 : Why ? S2 : Because Thanh Lam is pretier than Hong Nhung. What about you ? S1 : My favorite singer is Hong Nhung 4.Consolidation: - Retells content of the text * Home work - Do B 3 Write about Vo Nguyen Giap and about his batt ******************************************************************** *.

(343) Week 34 Date: May , 6 , 2011 Period : 99. Unit 16: Famous people Lesson : B 4 Aims : Reading for details about a famous people and talking about thier biographies Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Ss can talk about biographies of some famous people. Material : text book WA : Pair work , individual, group work Procedure T’s activities. Ss’ activities. I, Warm up Guessing game ( talking about famous people in the world ) Do you like ........... ?. group work. No , Not very much. I prefer ......... II, New lesson  Pre- reading - Pre teach a bulb ( realia ) :. bóng đèn. Listen and. (to) establish (expl ). thµnh lËp. guess. motion picture. tranh chuyển động. Listen &. a gramophone. :. máy quay đĩa. repeat. an author ( stiua ). t¸c gi¶. Read. an actor ( stiua ) :. diÔn viªn. Copy. a fairy tale ( situa ). truyÖn cæ tÝch. - Open- prediction. :.

(344) T introduces Thomas Edison and Hans Chistian Andersen - Ask Ss to predict what Thomas Edison and Hans Chistian Andersen did by doing the matching. individual. Key : Thomas Edison a bulb, an invention a gramophone ( to) establish Hans Chistian Andersen an actor, an author a fairy tale * While – reading - Ask Ss to read and check thier prediction. Play Lucky number -Comprehension questions ? 1. Who was Thomas Edison ? 2. What was his famous invention ? 3. What did he establish ? 4. What other inventions did he invent ? 5. Who was Hans Chistian Andersen? 6. What did he want to be ? 7. What kind of book did he write ? 8. what was he most famous for ? Key ;. 1. an inventor 2. the electric light bulb 3. the first central power station in New York City 4. the gramophone and motion pictures. 5. A danish author 6. an actor 7. novels, plays, poetry, ..... * Post reading :. group work.

(345) Role- Play B4- P 160. Pair work. example exchange: S1 : When were you born ?, Mr Edison ? S2 : I was born in 1847 S1 : Were you born in America ? S2 : Yes I was III, Home work - Do excercise in the work book - - Write about Thomas Edison and Hans Chiaian Andersen. Week 35 Date: May, 11 , 2011 Period : 100. Unit 16 Lesson 5 : Famous people. B 5 - P 161. Aims : Listening for detail about uncle Ho’s biography with sequence of the past tense Objectives : By the end of the lesson, Ss can talk about Uncle Ho’s biographies. Material : text book, tape and radio WA : Pair work , individual, group work Procedure T’s activities I, Warm up. Ss’ activities.

(346) Noughts and crosses Give the past form and make sentences with the verbs. know. go. work. become. write. invent. grow. bring. be. Group work. eg : I went to school yesterday. II, New lesson *pre-listening - Pre-teach. Listen and. ( to) leave (trans). guess. (to) move ( trans). Listen & repeat. (to) found ( situa). Read. (to) form (trans). Copy. - Check vocab : What and where - Prediction Ask Ss to predict the places where uncle Ho travelled to. individual. While- listening - Ask Ss to listen and check their prediction - Ask Ss to listen and complete the table B5 – p161. Listen. Keys: Uncle Ho Date of birth Left of VN Work in a hotel went to another country move again founded Vietnamese Communist Party Formed Viet minh front become President died  Post- listening Write it up. Year 1890 1911. Place Kim Lien Africa, England,. American 1900s London 1917 Paris 1923 Moscow 1930 guang zhow 1945 VN 1945 VN 1969 Ha noi. Listen and fill in the form.

(347) Ss use the table above to write a paragraph about Uncle Ho, using the verbs in the past eg: Uncle Ho was born in 1890 in Sen villege, Nam Dan district,. Individual. Nghe An province. He left VietN am in ...... III, Homework - Rewrite the Uncle Ho’s biography - Do excercises in the workbook. Week 36 Date: May 12,13 , 2011 Period :101,102. reviewtion I.Aims : The students will apply their knowledge to do the test well . Through the test , the teacher will be able to know about Ss’ knowledge . II.exercises: I.Supply the correct form of the verbs in brackets ..

(348) 1. 2. 3. 4. 5.. Yesterday , Hoa and her aunt ( go ) ………………to the market . I would like ( tell ) ………………you about my family . Why ( be ) …………you absent from school yesterday ? I ( be ) …………….fourteen years old next week . My father ( not watch ) …………………….TV last night . He ( read ) …………… newspapers and magazines . 6. When you ( buy ) ………………………….this dress ? - 2 days ago . 7. Be careful! the children ( cross ) ……………………….the street . II. Choose the best answer to complete the sentences . 1. She ……….her teeth twice a day .( Brushed / to brush / brushes ) 2. How ……..is your brother ? - He’s one meter seventy centimeters .( high/ tall / heavy ) 3. You mustn’t …………up late .( stay / to stay / staying ) 4. He can speak English well and …………can his sister ( Too/ So / Neither ) 5. Stop please . That is too …………..coffee .( lots of / much / little ) 6. We won’t attend the meeting tomorrow and ………will he .( So / either / Neither ) 7. A balanced diet is good …………….your health .( to / with / for ) 8. I am glad ………….you’re feeling better .( hear / to hear / heard ) III.Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . 1. Lan didn’t go to school yesterday because of her sickness . => Because Lan …………………………………………………………… 2. What is your daughter’s age , Mrs Mai ? => How ……………………………………………………………………. 3. It took Mr. Hoang an hour to walk to work yesterday . => Mr. Hoang spent ………………………………………………………… 4. How heavy is the chicken ? => What ………………………………………………………………………. IV.Fill in the blank with the appropriate preposition 1. 2. 3. 4.. Trang received a letter ………………her aunt last week . You should take care ……………….yourself . Eating too much candy is bad ……………….you . The dentist looked ……….my teeth and he told me ……………….my broken tooth 5. What’s wrong ……………..your daughter , Mrs. Mai ?.

(349) 6. We are working hard ………… the farm and your uncle often works ………….us . V.Read the passage then answer the questions . My name is John , and this is my story . Last year just before Christ mas my family and our uncle and aunt decided to go to Perth for holiday . We went in two cars but we were about halfway there my uncle wanted to turn round and come back . He said it was too far , and it was terribly hot, too. Even at night it was really hot . Anyway , what we decided to do was to drive back about 160 km to a place where the train went through . Then we put both cars on the train and we all went to Perth by train . That was fun . It was a good train . We had a good time in Perth but we had to cut our holiday short . You see , while we were there my grandmother ( mother’s mother) in Melourne died . Most of us flew back but my dad and my uncle came on the train with the two cars and then had to drive back to Melbourne from Port Pirie . 1. Why did John’s uncle want to come back ? A. Because it was too hot B. Because it was too far C. Because he was too tired D. Both A and B 2. In the end John’s family went to Perth ……………. A. By train B. By coach C. By car D. By plane 3. Who died when John’s family were on holiday ? A. His mother’s father B. His mother’s mother C. His father’s mother D. His father’s father 4. Most of John family came back ……………… A. By train B. By ship C. By plane D. By car.

(350) Week 34 Date: May, 17-18 , 2011 Period : 103,104. reviewtion I.Aims : The students will apply their knowledge to do the test well . Through the test , the teacher will be able to know about Ss’ knowledge . II.exercises: I.Choose the correct answers to complete the sentences . 1. 2. 3. 4. 5. 6. 7. 8.. She doesn’t like pork , and ……..does her uncle .( Either / So / Neither ) I would like ……….some fruit .( Buying / To buy / Buy ) You must drink …….water everyday . ( Much / Many / A little ) He was busy yesterday and ……….were his brothers ( So / Neither / Too) My mother didn’t wash it but I ………( didn’t / did / do ) Vegetables are good ……..your health ( To / with / for ) How ……is Nga ? She is 36 kilos . ( high / weight / heavy ) You should ……….your hands before meals .( to wash / wash / washing ). II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs . 1. Lan ( be ) …………very tired when she ( catch ) ……………a cold two days ago 2. He ( not come ) ……………………to the meeting last week . 3. I ( brush ) …………….my teeth everynight , but last night I ( forget ) …………… to brush them . 4. Where is your mother ? She ( Plant ) ……………….flowers in the garden . 5. Nga is now in her room. She ( iron ) …………………her clothes . She always ( do ) …………………it herself . III.Fill in the blanks with the suitable prepositions . 1. There is a good selection …………fruit ………….display . 2. My aunt sliced the beef …………………thin strips . 3. Linh set the table ……………plates , bowls , chopsticks and spoons ..

(351) 4. Salads are good …………your health , but we must wash them well ……..water . 5. We must clean hands …………………having a meal . 6. Hoa made cucumber salad ……………..some onions . IV.Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . 1. She has over 100 stamps in her collection . => There ……………………………………………………………. 2. What is the price of this cap ? => How much……………………………………………………….. 3. How long is this river ? => What ……………………………………………………………. 4. I do my homework in an hour . => It takes …………………………………………………………… V.Read the passage then answer the questions . My name is John , and this is my story . Last year just before Christ mas my family and our uncle and aunt decided to go to Perth for holiday . We went in two cars but we were about halfway there my uncle wanted to turn round and come back . He said it was too far , and it was terribly hot, too. Even at night it was really hot . Anyway , what we decided to do was to drive back about 160 km to a place where the train went through . Then we put both cars on the train and we all went to Perth by train . That was fun . It was a good train . We had a good time in Perth but we had to cut our holiday short . You see , while we were there my grandmother ( mother’s mother ) in Melourne died . Most of us flew back but my dad and my uncle came on the train with the two cars and then had to drive back to Melbourne from Port Pirie . 1. When did John’s family go to Perth ? …………………………………………………………………………….. 2. Why did John’s uncle want to come back ? ………………………………………………………………………………. 3. How did John’s family go to Perth in the end ? ……………………………………………………………………………… 4. Who in John’s family had to go by train and car to Melbourne ? ………………………………………………………………………………. III.Remark IV.Homework :.

(352) Ngµy so¹n 23-4-09 Ngµy d¹y 27-4-09. TuÇn35 reviewtion. I.Aims : The students will apply their knowledge to do the test well . Through the test , the teacher will be able to know about Ss’ knowledge . II.exercises: I. Choose the best answer : 1. You ought ……………..to the dentist . A. to go B. go C. going 2. This river is very …………….for the swimmers . A. danger B. dangerous C. dangerously 3. What would you like ……………..? A. see B. seeing C. to see 4. ……….is a fun , easy and inexpensive activity . A. a walking B. walking C. to walk 5. There are many good programs ………….teenagers . A. on B. for C. with.

(353) 6. We can learn more about the undersea world ……….Jacques Couteau’s invention. A. thanks to B. thanking to C. with thanks to 7. John is a fast runner . He runs very ……………. A. fast B. fastly C. quick . 8. Which do you prefer , playing sports or watching TV ? A. I prefer playing sports and watching TV to doing other things . B. I prefer playing sports to watching TV . C. I prefer playing sports because it can help me to stay healthy . II. Supply the correct forms of the verbs in bracbets . 1. When my father ( be ) …………young , He ( drink ) ……………..a lot of wine . 2. They ( perform ) ……………….” Romeo and Juliet” last Sunday . 3. She’ d like ( drink ) ………………a glass of cold water . 4. Many years ago, many people in Vietnam ( not have ) ………………….TV sets. 5. My younger brother prefers ( play ) …………….chess to ( watch) .. ………….cartoons . 6. Mai ( not like )…………………..reading books . She likes listening to music . III. Read the dialogue between Ba and Nam , then answer the questions . Ba : Would you like to see a movie , Nam ? Nam : Yes , I’d love to . What would you like tosee ? Ba : There is an interesting movie on at the New Age theater . Nam : What movie is it ? Ba : It’s a detective movie . Nam : OK . Let’s go this evening then . Ba : I’m sorry I can’t . I have to finish my homework tonight . What about tomorrow evening ? Nam : Sorry . I’m going to visit my grandmother . How about Friday evening ? Ba : That’s OK . Let’s meet at half past seven in front of the theater . 1. Where is the movie on ? …………………………………………………………………………………. 2. Why doesn’t Ba go to the theater tonight ? …………………………………………………………………………………. 3. Is Nam going to see a play with his parents tomorrow evening ? ………………………………………………………………………………….. 4. When will they go to the theater ? …………………………………………………………………………………. IV. Rewrite these sentences , beginning with the words given . 1. How about going to the movies this week ? => Why …………………………………………………………………………. 2. My father drives very carefully . => My father is ………………………………………………………………… 3. Reading books is more boring than watching TV . => Watching TV is more……………………………………………………… 4. You advise you not to watch TV too late ..

(354) => You should ………………………………………………………………. V. Listen . Then check True or False in the boxes . Statements 1. Nga , Lan and Long didn’t go to their English class yesterday. 2. Nga didn’t stay at home . She visited her grandmother . 3. Lan ate out in a restaurant with her friends . 4. Long watched TV and listened to music .. T. F.

(355)

Giao an ca nam

Tài liệu liên quan

Tài liệu bạn tìm kiếm đã sẵn sàng tải về